300
Feel the difference FordMondeo Owner's handbook

Mondeo MK3 Book

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Mondeo MK3 Book

Feel the differenceFordMondeoOwner's handbook

Page 2: Mondeo MK3 Book

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofdevelopment the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipment at any time withoutnotice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof, may not be reproducednor translated without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted.

© Ford Motor Company 2010

All rights reserved.

Part number: (CG3536en) 08/2010 20100929130022

E108837

Page 3: Mondeo MK3 Book

IntroductionAbout this handbook................................7Symbols glossary.......................................7Parts and accessories..............................7

Quick startQuick start..................................................11

Child safetyChild seats................................................22Booster cushions....................................23Child seat positioning.............................24ISOFIX anchor points..............................26Child safety locks....................................27

Occupant protectionPrinciple of operation..............................29Fastening the seat belts.........................31Seat belt height adjustment..................32Seat belt reminder..................................32Using seat belts during pregnancy......32Disabling the passenger airbag............32

Keys and remote controlsGeneral information on radiofrequencies..........................................34

Programming the remote control........34Changing the remote controlbattery...................................................34

LocksLocking and unlocking...........................37Global opening and closing...................39Keyless entry............................................41

Engine immobiliserPrinciple of operation..............................44Coded keys.............................................44Arming the engine immobiliser.............44Disarming the engine immobiliser........44

AlarmPrinciple of operation..............................45Arming the alarm.....................................47Disarming the alarm................................47

SteeringwheelAdjusting the steering wheel.................48Audio control...........................................48

Wipers andwashersWindscreen wipers.................................50Autowipers...............................................50Windscreen washers..............................51Rear window wiper and washers.........51Headlamp washers................................52Checking the wiper blades...................52Changing the wiper blades...................52

LightingLighting control........................................54Daytime running lamps (DRL)...............55Autolamps................................................55Automatic main beam control..............55Front fog lamps.......................................57Rear fog lamps........................................57Adjusting the headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps...........................................57

Headlamp levelling..................................57Hazard warning flashers........................58Adaptive front lighting system(AFS)......................................................59

Direction indicators.................................60Interior lamps............................................61Removing a headlamp...........................62Changing a bulb......................................63Bulb specification chart..........................69

Windows andmirrorsElectric windows......................................71

1

Table of contents

Page 4: Mondeo MK3 Book

Exterior mirrors........................................73Electric exterior mirrors..........................73Auto-dimming mirror..............................75Blind spot monitor...................................75

InstrumentsGauges.....................................................78Warning lamps and indicators..............80Audible warnings and indicators..........82

Information displaysGeneral information................................84Trip computer..........................................93Personalised settings.............................95Information messages...........................97

Climate controlPrinciple of operation............................106Air vents..................................................106Manual climate control.........................107Automatic climate control....................109Heated windows and mirrors...............112Auxiliary heater.......................................112Electric sunroof.......................................117

SeatsSitting in the correct position...............120Manual seats..........................................120Electric seats...........................................121Head restraints......................................123Rear seats..............................................123Heated seats..........................................124Ventilated seats.....................................125

Convenience featuresSun blinds...............................................126Instrument lighting dimmer..................126Clock.......................................................126Cigar lighter............................................126

Ashtray....................................................127Auxiliary power sockets........................127Cup holders............................................128Glove box...............................................128Storage compartments........................128Map pockets..........................................129Memory function...................................129Glasses holder.......................................130CD changer............................................130Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket.............131USB port..................................................131Floor mats...............................................131

Starting the engineGeneral information..............................132Ignition switch........................................132Keyless starting.....................................132Steering wheel lock...............................134Starting a petrol engine........................135Starting a petrol engine - E85.............135Starting a diesel engine........................136Diesel particulate filter (DPF)................137Switching off the engine.......................137Engine heater.........................................137

EcomodePrinciple of operation............................139Using Eco mode....................................139

Fuel and refuellingFuel quality - Petrol................................140Fuel quality - E85...................................140Fuel quality - Diesel...............................140Catalytic converter.................................141Fuel filler flap............................................141Refuelling................................................142Refuelling - E85......................................142Fuel consumption..................................142Technical specifications........................142

2

Table of contents

Page 5: Mondeo MK3 Book

TransmissionManual transmission.............................147Automatic transmission........................147

BrakesPrinciple of operation............................150Hints on driving with ABS.....................150Parking brake.........................................150

Stability controlPrinciple of operation.............................151Using stability control.............................151

Hill start assistPrinciple of operation............................153Using hill start assist..............................153

Active suspensionPrinciple of operation............................156Using active suspension......................156

Parking aidPrinciple of operation............................157Using the parking aid............................157

Rear viewcameraPrinciple of operation............................159Using the rear view camera.................159

Cruise controlPrinciple of operation............................162Using cruise control..............................162

Adaptive cruise control(ACC)

Principle of operation............................164Using ACC..............................................165Forward alert function..........................168

Speed limiterPrinciple of operation............................170Using the speed limiter.........................170

Driver alertPrinciple of operation............................172Using driver alert....................................172

Lane departurewarningPrinciple of operation............................174Using lane departure warning.............174

Load carryingGeneral information...............................176Luggage anchor points........................176Sliding loadspace floor..........................177Rear under floor storage......................179Luggage covers.....................................179Cargo nets..............................................180Roof racks and load carriers................181Dog guard...............................................181Load retaining fixtures..........................183

TowingTowing a trailer.......................................185Detachable tow ball..............................185

Driving hintsRunning-in..............................................189General driving points - Vehicles With:Sports Suspension............................189

Cold weather precautions...................189Driving through water...........................189

Emergency equipmentFirst aid kit...............................................190Warning triangle.....................................190

3

Table of contents

Page 6: Mondeo MK3 Book

FusesFuse box locations.................................191Changing a fuse....................................192Fuse specification chart.......................193

Vehicle recoveryTowing points........................................203Towing the vehicle on four wheels.....203

MaintenanceGeneral information..............................205Opening and closing the bonnet.......206Engine compartment overview - 1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)...........207

Engine compartment overview - 1.6LEcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)....................208

Engine compartment overview - 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4)..............................209

Engine compartment overview - 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi (MI4).........................210

Engine compartment overview - 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)...............................211

Engine compartment overview - 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..............212

Engine compartment overview - 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..............214

Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)...................................215

Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma)................................................215

Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)...........215

Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4).....................................................215

Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi(DW)Diesel/2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel...................................................216

Engine oil check.....................................216Engine coolant check...........................216Brake and clutch fluid check................217Power steering fluid check..................217Washer fluid check................................218

Technical specifications........................218

Vehicle careCleaning the exterior............................221Cleaning the interior..............................221Repairing minor paint damage...........222

Vehicle batteryUsing booster cables...........................223Battery connection points...................224

Wheels and tyresGeneral information..............................225Changing a road wheel.......................225Tyre repair kit.........................................230Tyre care................................................233Using winter tyres.................................234Using snow chains...............................234Tyre pressure monitoring system......234Technical specifications.......................235

Vehicle identificationVehicle identification plate...................239Vehicle identification number (VIN).....239

Technical specificationsTechnical specifications.......................240

TelephoneGeneral information..............................245Telephone setup...................................245Bluetooth setup....................................246Telephone controls...............................247Using the telephone - VehiclesWithout:Navigation System............................247

Using the telephone - Vehicles With:Navigation System............................250

Voice controlPrinciple of operation...........................252

4

Table of contents

Page 7: Mondeo MK3 Book

Using voice control...............................252Audio unit commands.........................253Telephone commands........................262Navigation system commands..........267Climate control commands................267

ConnectivityGeneral information..............................270Connecting an external device...........271Connecting an external device -Vehicles With: Bluetooth...................271

Using a USB device..............................272Using an iPod.........................................274

Navigation introductionRoad Safety...........................................278

Navigation systemGetting started......................................279

AppendicesType approvals......................................281Type approvals......................................281Electromagnetic compatibility............282

5

Table of contents

Page 8: Mondeo MK3 Book

6

Page 9: Mondeo MK3 Book

ABOUT THISHANDBOOK

Thank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thishandbook. Themore that you knowaboutit, the greater the safety and pleasure youwill get from driving it.

WARNING

Always drive with due care andattentionwhen using and operatingthe controls and features on your

vehicle.

Note: This handbook describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range, sometimes even before theyare generally available. It may describeoptions not fitted to your vehicle.

Note: Some of the illustrations in thishandbook may be used for differentmodels, so may appear different to yourvehicle. However, the essentialinformation in the illustrations is alwayscorrect.

Note: Always use and operate yourvehicle in line with all applicable laws andregulations.

Note: Pass on this handbook whenselling your vehicle. It is an integral part ofthe vehicle.

This vehicle has received theendorsement of TÜV, the accreditedinternational testing organisation, for itsallergy-friendly properties.

All materials used in the manufacture ofthe interior of this vehicle meet strictrequirements of the TÜV TOXPROOFCriteria Catalogue for Vehicle Interiors byTÜV Produkt and Umwelt GmbH and aredesigned to minimize the risk of allergicreactions.

Additionally an efficient pollen filterprotects the passengers against allergenparticles in the outdoor air.

For more information, contact TÜV atwww.tuv.com.

SYMBOLSGLOSSARY

Symbols in this handbook

WARNING

You risk death or serious injury toyourself and others if you do notfollow the instructions highlighted

by the warning symbol.

CAUTION

You risk damaging your vehicle if youdo not follow the instructionshighlighted by the caution symbol.

Symbols on your vehicle

When you see these symbols, read andfollow the relevant instructions in thishandbook before touching or attemptingadjustment of any kind.

PARTSANDACCESSORIES

Nowyou can be sure that yourFord parts are Ford parts

Your Ford has been built to the higheststandards using high quality Ford OriginalParts. As a result, you can enjoy driving itfor many years.

7

Introduction

Page 10: Mondeo MK3 Book

Should the unexpectedoccur and amajorpart needs replacing,we recommend thatyou accept nothing less than FordOriginalParts.

The use of Ford Original Parts ensuresthat your vehicle is repaired to itspre-accident condition and maintains itsmaximum residual value.

FordOriginal Partsmatch Ford's stringentsafety requirements and high standardsof fit, finish and reliability. Quite simply, theyrepresent the best overall repair value,including parts and labour costs.

Now it is easier to tell if you have reallybeen given Ford Original Parts. The Fordlogo is clearly visible on the following partsif they are Ford Original Parts. If yourvehicle has to be repaired, look for theclearly visible Ford branding and makesure that only Ford Original Parts havebeen used.

Look for the Ford logo on thefollowing parts

Sheetmetal

• Bonnet

• Doors

• Luggage compartment lid or tailgate

• Wing

E131722

Bumper and radiator grille

• Radiator grille

• Front and rear bumper

8

Introduction

Page 11: Mondeo MK3 Book

E131723

Exteriormirror

E131724

Glass

• Rear window

• Side glass

• Windscreen

E88507

9

Introduction

Page 12: Mondeo MK3 Book

Lighting

• Rear lamps

• Headlamp

E131725

10

Introduction

Page 13: Mondeo MK3 Book

QUICKSTART

Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive

E87719

A J K L M NC DB H IGFE

P OV U T S R Q

11

Quick start

Page 14: Mondeo MK3 Book

Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive

E87720

ED F G B AML H CI

O QU T S R VP

KJ N

Lighting controls. See Lighting control (page 54).A

Air vents. See Air vents (page 106).B

Direction indicators. SeeDirectionindicators (page60). Telephone controlbuttons. See Telephonecontrols (page 247). Voice control buttons. SeeUsingvoicecontrol (page 252). Lane departure warning control buttons.See Lane departurewarning (page 174).

C

Audio controls. See Audio control (page 48).D

Instrument cluster. SeeGauges (page 78).E

Information display controls. See Information displays (page 84).F

Wiper lever. SeeWindscreenwipers (page 50).G

Start button. See Keyless starting (page 132).H

Audio or navigation unit. See separate handbook.I

12

Quick start

Page 15: Mondeo MK3 Book

Stability control (ESP) switch. See Using stability control (page 151).J

Parking aid switch. See Using the parking aid (page 157).K

Hazard warning flasher switch. SeeHazardwarning flashers (page 58).L

Passenger airbagdeactivationwarning lamp. SeeDisablingthepassengerairbag (page 32).

M

Heated windscreen and heated rear window switches. See Heatedwindows andmirrors (page 112).

N

Climate controls. SeeManualclimatecontrol (page 107). SeeAutomaticclimate control (page 109).

O

Cigar lighter. See Cigar lighter (page 126).P

Ignition switch. See Ignition switch (page 132).Q

Cruise control and speed limiter switches. SeeUsingcruisecontrol (page162). Adaptive cruise control switches. SeeUsingACC (page 165). Speedlimiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 170).

R

Steeringwheel adjustment lever. SeeAdjustingthesteeringwheel (page48).

S

Horn.T

Cruise control and speed limiter switches. SeeUsingcruisecontrol (page162). Adaptive cruise control switches. SeeUsingACC (page 165). Speedlimiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 170).

U

Driver knee airbag. See Principle of operation (page 29).V

13

Quick start

Page 16: Mondeo MK3 Book

Electric child safety locks

E124779

See Child safety locks (page 27).

Keyless entry

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be locatedwithin oneof the three external detection ranges.

Unlocking the vehicle

E78278

Pull a door handle to unlock all the doorsand the luggage compartment lid anddisarm the alarm.

Locking the vehicle

E87384

E87435

14

Quick start

Page 17: Mondeo MK3 Book

See Keyless entry (page 41).

Adjusting the steeringwheel

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.

1

2

2

E95178

3E95179

See Adjusting the steeringwheel(page 48).

Autowipers

E70315

BA

C

High sensitivityA

OnB

Low sensitivityC

Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control.

See Autowipers (page 50).

Changing thewiper blades

CAUTION

You can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access tothe wiper blades for freeing them

from snow and ice. The windscreenwipers will return to their normal positionas soon as you switch on the ignition somake sure that the outside of thewindscreen is free from snow and icebefore you switch on the ignition.

15

Quick start

Page 18: Mondeo MK3 Book

E85833

A

E75188

Switch off the ignition andmove thewiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the serviceposition.

See Changing thewiper blades(page 52).

Autolamps

E70719

The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.

See Lighting control (page 54).

Automaticmain beamcontrol

WARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.

The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and noother traffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.

SeeAutomaticmainbeamcontrol(page 55).

Electricwindows

Note: To reduce wind noise or buffetingwhen just one window is open, open theopposite window slightly.

16

Quick start

Page 19: Mondeo MK3 Book

See Electricwindows (page 71).

Electric foldingmirrors

E72623

SeeElectricexteriormirrors (page73).

Reversemirror dipping

Depending on the selected mirrorposition, the relevant exterior mirror willdip whenever you select reverse gear,giving you a view of the kerb.

When you first use this feature, themirrorswill dip to a preset position. You canprogramme the degree of dipping.

SeeElectricexteriormirrors (page73).

Blind spot information system(BLIS)

WARNING

Do not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over

your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.

E124736

See Blind spotmonitor (page 75).

Information displays

E70499

17

Quick start

Page 20: Mondeo MK3 Book

Use the arrow buttons to navigatethrough the menus and pressOK tomake a selection.

See Informationdisplays (page 84).

Manual climate control

Cooling the interior quickly

E71381

Heating the interior quickly

E71377

Recommendedsettingsforcooling

E131534

Open the centre and side air vents.

Direct the centre air vents upwards andthe side air vents toward the sidewindows.

Recommendedsettingsforheating

E131535

Close the centre air vents and open theside air vents.

Direct the side air vents toward the sidewindows.

Defrosting and demisting thewindscreen

E71382

SeeManual climate control (page107).

Automatic climate control

E91391

See Automatic climate control(page 109).

18

Quick start

Page 21: Mondeo MK3 Book

Engineidlespeedafterstarting

The engine may idle at a higher speedthan normal immediately after startingfrom cold.

See Starting the engine (page 132).

Keyless starting

E85766

Press the start button.

Stopping the enginewhen thevehicle ismoving

WARNING

Switching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering

assistance. The steering will not belocked, but higher effort will be required.When the ignition is switched off someelectrical circuits, warning lamps andindicators may also be OFF.

Press and hold the start button for twoseconds, or press three timeswithin threeseconds.

See Keyless starting (page 132).

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF

regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and theexhaust will radiate a considerableamount of heat during and after DPFregeneration, andafter youhave switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.

See Diesel particulate filter (DPF)(page 137).

Fuel filler flap

E86613

Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.

E119080

19

Quick start

Page 22: Mondeo MK3 Book

Insert the fuel nozzle up to and includingthe first notch on the nozzle. Keep itresting on the cover of the fuel pipeopening.

WARNING

We recommend that you wait atleast 10 seconds before removingthe fuel nozzle to allow any residual

fuel to drain into the fuel tank.

E119081

Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.

See Fuel filler flap (page 141).

Manual transmission

Selecting reverse gear

E99067

On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

SeeManualtransmission (page 147).

Automatic transmission

Note:Donot press thebrakepedalwhenremoving the key from the ignition switch.

Selector lever positions

WARNING

Apply the brakes beforemoving theselector lever and keep themapplied until you are ready to move

off.

E80836

S

ParkP

ReverseR

NeutralN

DriveD

Manual shifting and sportmodeS

SeeAutomatic transmission (page147).

Rear viewcamera

WARNING

The camera does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

20

Quick start

Page 23: Mondeo MK3 Book

The camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.

E99105

See Rear viewcamera (page 159).

Speed limiter

The system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.

See Speed limiter (page 170).

Driver alert

WARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

The systemcalculates an alertness scorewhich canbedisplayedon the informationdisplay. If the systemdetects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is deteriorationin your driving style then warnings will beissued.

See Driver alert (page 172).

Lane departurewarning

WARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

Activate the system using the switcheson the indicator stalk.

E131360

A

B

System onA

System offB

SeeLanedeparturewarning (page174).

Towing the vehicle on fourwheels

CAUTION

For certain engine and transmissioncombinations, it is recommendednotto tow the vehicle with the drive

wheels on the ground.

See Towing the vehicle on fourwheels (page 203).

21

Quick start

Page 24: Mondeo MK3 Book

CHILDSEATS

E68916

WARNINGSSecure children that are less than150 centimetres tall or less than 12years of age in a suitable, approved

child restraint, in the rear seat.

Original text according to ECER94.01: ExtremeHazard!Donot usea rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in front ofit!

Read and follow themanufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting achild restraint.

Do not modify child restraints in anyway.

Do not hold a child on your lapwhenthe vehicle is moving.

Do not leave unattended children inyour vehicle.

If your vehicle has been involved inan accident, have the child restraintschecked by properly trained

technicians.

Note:Mandatory use of child restraintsvaries from country to country.

Only child restraints certified toECE-R44.03 (or later) have been testedand approved for use in your vehicle. Achoice of these are available from yourDealer.

Child restraints for differentmass groups

Use the correct child restraint as follows:

Baby safety seat

E68918

Secure children that weigh less than 13kilograms in a rearward facing baby safetyseat (Group 0+) in the rear seat.

22

Child safety

Page 25: Mondeo MK3 Book

Child safety seat

E68920

Secure children that weigh between 13and 18 kilograms in a child safety seat(Group 1) in the rear seat.

BOOSTERCUSHIONS

WARNINGSDo not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with only the lapstrap of the seat belt.

Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushionwith a seat belt thatis slack or twisted.

Do not put the seat belt under yourchild’s arm or behind its back.

Do not use pillows, books or towelsto boost your child’s height.

Make sure that your children sit inan upright position.

Secure children that weigh morethan 15 kilograms but are less than150 centimetres tall in a booster

seat or a booster cushion.

CAUTION

When using a child seat on a rearseat, make sure that the child seatrests tightly against the vehicle seat.

It may be necessary to lift or remove thehead restraint. See Head restraints(page 123).

Booster seat (Group2)

E70710

We recommend that you use a boosterseat that combines a cushion with abackrest instead of a booster cushiononly. The raised seating position will allowyou to position the shoulder strap of theadult seat belt over the centre of yourchild’s shoulder and the lap strap tightlyacross its hips.

23

Child safety

Page 26: Mondeo MK3 Book

Booster cushion (Group3)

E68924

CHILDSEATPOSITIONING

WARNINGSPlease consult your Dealer for thelatest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.

WARNINGSOriginal text according to ECER94.01: ExtremeHazard!Donot usea rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in front ofit!

When using a child restraint with asupport leg on a second row seat,make sure the support leg rests

securely on the floor.

When using a forward facing childseat on a second row seat, alwaysremove the head restraint from that

seat. SeeHeadrestraints (page 123).

When using a child seat with a seatbelt, make sure that the seat belt isnot slack or twisted.

Note:When using a child seat on a frontseat, always adjust the front passengerseat to its fully rearwards position. If itproves difficult to tighten the lap sectionof the seat belt without slack remaining,adjust the seatback to the fully uprightposition and raise the height of the seat.See Seats (page 120).

Mass group categories

Seating positions 3210+0

22 - 36 kg15 - 25 kg9 - 18 kgUp to 13kg

Up to 10kg

UF¹UF¹UF¹XXFront passenger seatwith airbagON

U¹U¹U¹U¹U¹Front passenger seatwith airbagOFF

UUUUURear seats

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.

24

Child safety

Page 27: Mondeo MK3 Book

U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved childseat, in the rear seat.

UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in thismass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a governmentapproved child seat, in the rear seat.

ISOFIX child seats

Mass group categories

Seating positions10+

Forward facingRear facing

9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kg

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classFront seat

Seat type

A, B, B1, C, D*C, D, E*Size classRear outboard seat ISOFIX

IL, IUF***IL**Seat type

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classRear centre seat

Seat type

ILSuitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systemsof thesemi-universal category.Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.

IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal categoryapproved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.*The ISOFIX size class for bothuniversal andsemi-universal child restraints systemsis defined by the capital letters A toG. These identification letters are displayed onISOFIX child restraints.**At time of publishing the recommendedGroupO+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the BritaxRomer Baby Safe. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.***At time of publishing the recommendedGroup 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax RomerDuo. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommendedchild seats.

25

Child safety

Page 28: Mondeo MK3 Book

ISOFIX ANCHORPOINTS

WARNING

Use an anti-rotation device whenusing the ISOFIX system. Werecommend the use of a top tether

or support leg.

Your vehicle is fitted with ISOFIX anchorpoints that accommodate universallyapproved ISOFIX child restraints.

The ISOFIX system comprises two rigidattachment arms on the child restraintthat attach to anchor points on theoutboard rear seats, where the cushionand backrest meet. Tether anchor pointsare fitted behind the outboard rear seatsfor child restraints with a top tether.

Top tether anchor points

E87146

E93616

E93514

Attaching a child seatwith toptethers

WARNING

Do not attach a tether strap toanything other than the correcttether anchor point.

Note:Where applicable, remove theluggage cover to ease installation. SeeLuggage covers (page 179).Note:On4-door vehicles,make sure thetether strap tightening mechanismremains accessible when the seatback isfully engaged.

26

Child safety

Page 29: Mondeo MK3 Book

E87591

1. Place the child seat on the back seatcushion and fold the relevant seatbackforwards. SeeRearseats (page123).

2. Remove the head restraint. SeeHead restraints (page 123).

WARNING

Make sure the top tether strap is notslack or twisted and is properlylocated on the anchor point.

3. Route the tether strap to the anchorpoint.

WARNING

Make sure that the seatback issecure and fully engaged in thecatch.

4. Push the seatback to the uprightposition.

E87145

5. Push the child seat back firmly toengage the ISOFIX lower anchorpoints.

6. Tighten the tether strap in linewith thechild seatmanufacturer's instructions.

CHILDSAFETY LOCKS

WARNING

You cannot open the doors frominside if you have put the child safetylocks on.

Manual child safety locks

Note:On vehicleswith keyless entry, usethe spare key. SeeKeylessentry (page41).

27

Child safety

Page 30: Mondeo MK3 Book

E78298

Left-hand side

Turn anti-clockwise to lock and clockwiseto unlock.

Right-hand side

Turn clockwise to lock and anti-clockwiseto unlock.

Electric child safety locks

Note:Pressing the switchwill also disablethe rear electric window switches.

E124779

28

Child safety

Page 31: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

Airbags

WARNINGSDo not modify the front of yourvehicle in any way. This couldadversely affect deployment of the

airbags.

Original text according to ECER94.01: ExtremeHazard!Donot usea rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an airbag in front ofit!

Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition that allows the airbag to achieveits optimum effect. See Sitting in thecorrect position (page 120).

Have repairs to the steering wheel,steering column, seats, airbags andseat belts carried out by a properly

trained technician.

Keep the areas in front of theairbags free from obstruction. Donot affix anything to or over the

airbag covers.

Do not poke sharp objects intoareas where airbags are fitted. Thiscould damage and adversely affect

deployment of the airbags.

Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby a properly trained technician.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and seea cloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.

Note: Only wipe airbag covers with adamp cloth.

Driverandfrontpassengerairbags

E74302

The driver and front passenger airbagswill deploy during significant frontalcollisions or collisions that are up to 30degrees from the left or the right. Theairbags will inflate within a fewthousandths of a second and deflate oncontact with the occupants, thuscushioning forward body movement.During minor frontal collisions, overturns,rear collisions and side collisions, the driverand front passenger airbags will notdeploy.

Driver knee airbag

CAUTION

Do not attempt to open the driverknee airbag cover.

The driver knee airbag will deploy duringfrontal collisions or collisions that are upto 30 degrees from the left or the right.The airbag will inflate within a fewthousandths of a second and deflate oncontact with the occupants, thusproviding a cushion between the driver’sknees and the steering column. Duringoverturns, rear collisions and sidecollisions, the knee airbag will not deploy.

For item location: SeeQuickstart (page11).

29

Occupant protection

Page 32: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: The knee airbag has a lowerdeployment threshold than the frontairbags. During a minor collision, it ispossible that only the knee airbagdeploys.

Side airbags

E72658

Side airbags are fitted inside the seatbackof the front seats. A label indicates thatside airbags are fitted to your vehicle.

The side airbags will deploy duringsignificant lateral collisions. The airbagswill inflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe chest and shoulder areas. Duringminor lateral collisions, overturns, frontcollisions and rear collisions, the sideairbags will not deploy.

Curtain airbags

E75004

Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trimpanels over the front and rear sidewindows. Moulded badges in the B-pillartrim panels indicate that curtain airbagsare fitted to your vehicle.

The curtain airbags will deploy duringsignificant lateral collisions. The airbag willinflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe head. During minor lateral collisions,front collisions, rear collisions, or overturnsthe curtain airbags will not deploy.

Seat belts

WARNINGSWear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition to achieve its optimum effect.See Sitting in the correct position(page 120).

Never use a seat belt for more thanone person.

Use the correct buckle for each seatbelt.

30

Occupant protection

Page 33: Mondeo MK3 Book

WARNINGSDo not use a seat belt that is slackor twisted.

Do notwear thick clothing. The seatbeltmust fit tightly around your bodyto achieve its optimum effect.

Position the shoulder strap of theseat belt over the centre of yourshoulder and position the lap strap

tightly across your hips.

The driver and front passenger seat beltretractors are fitted with a seat beltpretensioner. Seat belt pretensionershave a lower deployment threshold thanthe airbags. During minor collisions, it ispossible that only the seat beltpretensioners will deploy.

Status after a collision

WARNING

Seat belts subjected to strain, as aresult of an accident, should berenewed and the anchorages

checked by a properly trained technician.

FASTENINGTHESEATBELTS

WARNING

Insert the tongue into the buckleuntil you hear a distinct click. Youhave not fastened the seat belt

properly if you do not hear a click.

E74124

E85817

Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if youpull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.

Press the red button on the buckle torelease the belt. Let it retract completelyand smoothly.

31

Occupant protection

Page 34: Mondeo MK3 Book

SEATBELTHEIGHTADJUSTMENT

E87511

Note: Lifting the slider slightly whilepressing the locking button makes iteasier to release the locking mechanism.

To raise or lower, press the locking buttonon the adjuster and move as necessary.

SEATBELTREMINDER

WARNING

Theoccupant protection systemwillonly provide optimum protectionwhen you use the seat belt properly.

The seat belt reminder warninglamp illuminates and an audiblewarning will sound if the driver's

or front seat passenger's seat belt hasnot been fastened and the vehicleexceeds a relatively low speed. It will alsoilluminate if the driver's or front seatpassenger's seat belt is unfastenedwhenthe vehicle ismoving. The audiblewarningand warning lamp will go off after sevenminutes.

Deactivating the seat beltreminder

See your dealer.

USINGSEATBELTSDURINGPREGNANCY

E68587

WARNING

Position the seat belt correctly foryour safety and that of your unbornchild. Do not use only the lap strap

or the shoulder strap.

Position the lap strap comfortably acrossyour hips and low beneath your pregnantabdomen. Position the shoulder strapbetween your breasts, above and to theside of your pregnant abdomen.

DISABLINGTHEPASSENGERAIRBAG

WARNING

Make sure that the passengerairbag is disabled when using arearward facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat.

32

Occupant protection

Page 35: Mondeo MK3 Book

E71313

Fitting the passenger airbagdeactivation switch

WARNING

If you need to fit a child restraint ona seat protected by an operationalairbag in front of it, have a

passenger airbag deactivation switchfitted. Ask your dealer for furtherinformation.

Note: The key switch is located in theglove compartment with an airbagdeactivation lamp in the instrument panel.

If the airbag warning lamp illuminates orflasheswhen you are driving, this indicatesamalfunction. SeeWarninglampsandindicators (page 80). Remove the childrestraint and have the system checkedimmediately.

Disablingthepassengerairbag

A BE71312

DisabledA

EnabledB

Turn the switch to position A.

When you switch the ignition on, checkthat the passenger airbag deactivationwarning lamp illuminates.

Enabling thepassengerairbag

WARNING

Make sure that the passengerairbag is enabledwhen you arenotusing a child restraint on the front

passenger seat.

Turn the switch to position B.

33

Occupant protection

Page 36: Mondeo MK3 Book

GENERALINFORMATIONONRADIO FREQUENCIES

CAUTION

The radio frequency used by yourremote control can also be used byother short distance radio

transmissions (e.g. amateur radios,medical equipment,wirelessheadphones,remote controls and alarm systems). Ifthe frequencies are jammed, you will notbe able to use your remote control. Youcan lock and unlock the doors with thekey.

Note: You could unlock the doors if youpress the buttons on the remote controlunintentionally.

The operating range between yourremote control and your vehicle variesdepending on the environment.

PROGRAMMINGTHEREMOTECONTROL

You can programme amaximumof eightremote controls to use with your vehicle(including any suppliedwith your vehicle).

Programming a new remotecontrol

1. Insert the key in the ignition.

2. Cycle the key fromposition0 to II andthen back to 0 four times within sixseconds.

3. Leave the key in position 0 and pressany button on the remote controlwithin 10 seconds. You will receiveconfirmation via a chime or LED thatprogramming has been successful.

Note: Further remote controls may beprogrammed at this stage.

4. Press any button on each additionalremote control within 10 seconds ofeach other.

Reprogramming theunlockingfunction

Note:When you press the unlock buttoneither all the doors are unlocked or onlythe driver’s door is unlocked. Pressing theunlock button again unlocks all the doors.

Press and hold the unlock and lockbuttons on the remote key simultaneouslyfor at least four seconds with the ignitionoff. The direction indicators will flash twiceto confirm the change.

To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.

CHANGINGTHEREMOTECONTROLBATTERY

E107998

Make sure that you dispose ofold batteries in anenvironmentally friendly way.

Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.

Remote control with a foldingkey blade

E1288092

1

1. Insert a screwdriver in the positionshown and gently push the clip.

34

Keys and remote controls

Page 37: Mondeo MK3 Book

2. Press the clip down to release thebattery cover.

E128810

3. Carefully remove the cover.

E128811

4. Turn the remote control over toremove the battery.

5. Install a newbattery (3VCR2032)withthe + facing upwards.

6. Replace the battery cover.

Remote control without afolding key blade

1

2

1

E87964

1. Press and hold the pushbuttons onthe edges to release the cover.Carefully remove the cover.

2. Remove the key blade.

E105362

3

3. Twist a flat bladed screwdriver in theposition shown to separate the twohalves of the remote control.

35

Keys and remote controls

Page 38: Mondeo MK3 Book

E119190

4

4. Carefully insert the screwdriver in theposition shown to open the remotecontrol.

E125860

5

CAUTION

Do not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.

5. Carefully prise out the battery with thescrewdriver.

6. Install a newbattery (3VCR2032)withthe + facing downwards.

7. Assemble the two halves of theremote control.

8. Install the key blade.

36

Keys and remote controls

Page 39: Mondeo MK3 Book

LOCKINGANDUNLOCKING

Central locking

You can only centrally lock the doors ifthey are all closed.

Note: The driver’s door can be unlockedwith the key. This needs to be used if theremote control or keyless entry is notfunctioning.

Note: Central locking also locks andunlocks the fuel filler flap.

Double locking

WARNING

Donot activate double lockingwhenpersons or animals are inside thevehicle. You will not be able to

unlock the doors from the inside if youhave double locked them.

E71961

Double locking is a theft protection featurethat prevents someone fromopening thedoors from the inside. You can onlydouble lock the doors if they are all closed.

Locking and unlockingconfirmation

When you unlock the doors, the directionindicators will flash once.

When you lock the doors, the directionindicators will flash twice.

Locking and unlocking thedoorswith the key

B

E71962

A

B

A

UnlockA

LockB

Double locking the doorswiththe key

Turn the key to the lock position twicewithin three seconds to double lock thedoors.

37

Locks

Page 40: Mondeo MK3 Book

Locking and unlocking thedoors and the luggagecompartment lidwith theremote control

E87379

A B C

UnlockA

LockB

Luggage compartment lidunlock (press twice)

C

Lockingthedoorsandthe luggagecompartment lidwith the remotecontrol

Press button B once.

Double locking the doors and theluggage compartment lidwith theremote control

Press button B twice within threeseconds.

Locking and unlocking thedoors from inside

Driver's door

A

B

E71958

Lock all doorsA

Unlock all doorsB

Front and rear passenger doors

E98653

To lock the front and rear passengerdoors individually, press the button andclose the door when leaving the vehicle.

38

Locks

Page 41: Mondeo MK3 Book

Luggage compartment lid

Openingtheluggagecompartmentlidwith the remote control

Press button C on the remote controltwice within three seconds.

Closing the luggage compartmentlid

4-door

E89131

5-door

E89132

Estate

E89133

A recessed grip is incorporated inside theluggage compartment lid to facilitateclosing.

Automatic relocking

The doors will relock automatically if youdo not open a door within 45 seconds ofunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol. The door locks and the alarm willreturn to their previous state.

Reprogramming theunlockingfunction

The unlocking function may bereprogrammed so that only the driver’sdoor is unlocked. See Programmingthe remote control (page 34).

GLOBALOPENINGANDCLOSING

You can also operate the electricwindowswith the ignition off via the globalopening and global closing function.

Note: Global closing will only operate ifyou have set the memory correctly foreach window. See Electricwindows(page 71).

39

Locks

Page 42: Mondeo MK3 Book

Global opening

E71955

To open all the windows, press and holdthe unlock button for at least threeseconds. Press either the lock or theunlockbutton again to stop the openingfunction.

Global closing

Vehicleswithout keyless entry

WARNING

Take care when using globalclosing. In an emergency, press abutton immediately to stop.

E71956

To close all the windows, press and holdthe lock button for at least threeseconds. Press any button again to stopthe closing function. The anti-trap functionis also active during global closing.

Vehicleswith keyless entry

E87384

WARNING

Take care when using globalclosing. In an emergency, press thebutton on the driver’s door handle

to stop.

Note: Global closing can be activatedusing the button on the driver’s doorhandle. Global opening and closing canalso be activated using the buttons on thepassive key.

To close all the windows, press and holdthe button on the driver’s door handle forat least two seconds. The anti-trapfunction is also active during globalclosing.

40

Locks

Page 43: Mondeo MK3 Book

KEYLESSENTRY

General information

WARNING

The keyless entry system may notfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such

as mobile phones.

Note: If the door handles are pulledrepeatedly during a short period of timewithout the presence of a valid passivekey, the system will become inoperablefor 30 seconds.

The passive entry systemwill not functionif:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.

Note: If the passive entry system doesnot function, you will need to use the keyblade to lock and unlock your vehicle.

The keyless system allows the driver tooperate the vehicle without the use of akey or remote control.

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be locatedwithin oneof the three external detection ranges.These are located approximately one anda half metres from the driver and frontpassenger door handles and the luggagecompartment lid.

Passive key

The vehicle can be locked and unlockedwith the passive key. The passive key canalso be used as a remote control. SeeLocking and unlocking (page 37).

Locking the vehicle

E87384

E87435

WARNING

The vehicle does not lock itselfautomatically. If no locking button ispressed, the vehicle will remain

unlocked.

41

Locks

Page 44: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: If locking from the luggagecompartment lid, the passive key mustbe within the luggage compartment liddetection range.

Locking buttons are located on each ofthe front doors and the luggagecompartment lid.

To activate central locking and arm thealarm:• Press a locking button once.

To activate double locking, to arm thealarm and the interior sensors:• Press a locking button twice within

three seconds.

Note: Once activated, the vehicle willremain locked for approximately threeseconds. This is to allow you to pull a doorhandle and check if the vehicle is locked.When the delay period is over, the doorscan be opened again, provided thepassive key is within the respectivedetection range.

Luggage compartment lid

Note: The luggage compartment lidcannot be closed and will pop back up ifthe passive key is located inside theluggage compartment.

Note: If a second valid passive key islocated within the luggage compartmentlid detection range, the luggagecompartment lid can be closed.

Unlocking the vehicle

Note: If the vehicle remains locked forlonger than five days, the systemwill enteran energy-savingmode. This is to reducethe discharge of the vehicle battery.Whenthe vehicle is unlockedwhile in thismode,the reaction time of the systemmay be alittle longer than normal. Unlocking thevehicle once will deactivate theenergy-saving mode.

E78278

Pull one of the door handles or theluggage compartment lid handle.

Note: A valid passive key must belocatedwithin the detection range of thatdoor.

One long flash of the direction indicatorsconfirms that all the doors, the luggagecompartment lid and the fuel filler flaphave been unlocked and that the alarmhas been disarmed.

Unlocking only the driver's door

If the unlocking function is reprogrammedso that only the driver’s door is unlocked( See Keys and remote controls(page 34). ), note the following:

If the driver’s door is the first door whichis opened, the other doors and theluggage compartment lid will remainlocked. All the other doors can beunlocked from inside the vehicle bypressing the unlock button next to thedriver’s door handle. Doors can beunlocked individually by pulling the interiordoor handles on those doors.

If the front passenger door or one of therear doors is the first door which isopened, all the doors and the luggagecompartment lid will be unlocked.

42

Locks

Page 45: Mondeo MK3 Book

Disabled keys

Any keys left inside the vehicle interiorwhen it is locked will be disabled.

A disabled key cannot be used to turn theignition on or start the engine.

In order to use these passive keys again,they have to be enabled.

To enable all your passive keys, unlockthe vehicle using a passive key or theremote control unlocking function.

All passive keys will then be enabled if theignition is turned on or the vehicle isstarted using a valid key.

Locking and unlocking thedoorswith the key blade

1

2

1

E87964

1. Carefully remove the cover.

2. Remove the key blade and insert itinto the lock.

43

Locks

Page 46: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

The engine immobiliser is a theftprotection system that prevents someonefrom starting the engine with anincorrectly coded key.

CODEDKEYS

Note:Do not shield your keys withmetalobjects. This may prevent the receiverfrom recognising your key as a valid one.

Note: Have all of your remaining keyserased and recoded if you lose a key. Askyour dealer for further information. Havereplacement keys recoded togetherwithyour existing keys.

If you lose a key, you can obtain areplacement from your Ford Dealer. Ifpossible, provide them with the keynumber from the tag provided with theoriginal keys. You can also obtainadditional keys from your Ford Dealer.

ARMINGTHEENGINEIMMOBILISER

The engine immobiliser is armedautomatically a short time after you haveswitched the ignition off.

DISARMINGTHEENGINEIMMOBILISER

The engine immobiliser is disarmedautomaticallywhen you switch the ignitionon with a correctly coded key.

If the message Immobiliser activeappears in the information display, yourkey has not been recognised. Removethe key and try again.

If you are unable to start the engine witha correctly coded key, this indicates amalfunction. Themessage Immobiliseractive will appear in the informationdisplay when you switch on the ignition.Have the immobiliser checkedimmediately.

44

Engine immobiliser

Page 47: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

Alarmsystem

Your vehicle may be equipped with oneof the following alarm systems:

• Perimeter alarm.

• Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.

• Category one alarm with interiorsensors andbattery back-up sounder.

• Category one alarm with interiorsensors, battery back-up sounder andtilt sensors.

Perimeter alarm

The perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorised access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the bonnet. It alsoprotects the audio unit.

Interior sensors

Vehicleswith sunroof

E71401

Vehicleswithout sunroof

E131656

WARNING

The sensors must not be coveredup. Do not activate the alarm withfull guard if any persons, animals or

other moving objects are inside thevehicle.

The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorised intrusion by sensing anymovement within the vehicle.

Battery back-up sounder

The battery back-up sounder is an extraalarm system which will sound a sirenwhen the alarm is triggered. It is armeddirectly when you lock the vehicle. Thesounder has its own battery and willsound an alarm siren even if someonedisconnects the vehicle battery or thebattery back-up sounder itself.

Tilt sensors

The tilt sensors detect if someoneattempts to steal a wheel or tow thevehicle away by sensing changes in theinclination of the vehicle.

Note:When travelling on a ferry with thealarm armed, deactivate the tilt sensorsby selecting reduced guard. This willprevent the alarm from being triggeredby the movement.

Triggering the alarm

Once armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:

• If someone opens a door, the tailgateor the bonnet without a valid key orremote control.

• If someone removes the audio ornavigation system.

• If the ignition is turned to position I, IIor III without a valid key.

• If the interior sensors detectmovement within the vehicle.

45

Alarm

Page 48: Mondeo MK3 Book

• On vehicles with a battery back-upsounder, if someone disconnects thevehicle battery or the battery back-upsounder itself.

• If the tilt sensors detect a change inthe inclination of the vehicle.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm hornwillsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.

Any further attempts to perform one ofthe above will trigger the alarm again.

Full and reduced guard

Full guard

Full guard is the standard setting.

In full guard, the interior and tilt sensorsare activated when you arm the alarm.

Note: This may result in false alarms ifanimals or moving objects are inside thevehicle or, on vehicles with tilt sensors,when travelling on a ferry.

Reduced guard

In reduced guard, the interior and tiltsensors are deactivated when you armthe alarm.

Note: You can set the alarm to reducedguard for the current ignition cycle only.The next time you switch on the ignition,the alarm will be reset to full guard.

Ask on Exit

You can set the information display to askyou each time which level of guard youwish to set.

If you select Ask on Exit, the messageReduced guard? appears in theinstrument cluster display each time youswitch the ignition off.

If you wish to arm the alarmwith reducedguard, press theOK button when thismessage appears.

If youwish to arm the alarmwith full guard,leave the vehiclewithout pressing theOKbutton.

Selecting full or reduced guard

Note: SelectingReduced does not setthe alarmpermanently to reduced guard.It sets it to reduced guard only for thecurrent ignition cycle. If you regularly setthe alarm to reduced guard, select Askon Exit.

E70499

E74509

Full Guard

Alarm

ReducedAsk on Exit

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

46

Alarm

Page 49: Mondeo MK3 Book

3. Highlight Alarm and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Reduced or Full guard. Ifyou prefer to be asked each time youswitch off the ignition, select Ask onExit.

5. Press theOK button to confirm theselection.

6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. To return to the trip computerdisplay directly, hold the left arrowbutton pressed.

Informationmessages

See Informationmessages (page97).

ARMINGTHEALARM

To arm the alarm, lock the vehicle. SeeLocks (page 37).

DISARMINGTHEALARM

Vehicleswithout keyless entry

Perimeter alarm

Disarmand silence the alarmby unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded key, orunlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarm

Disarmand silence the alarmby unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded keywithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.

Vehicleswith keyless entry

Note: A valid passive key must belocatedwithin the detection range of thatdoor for keyless entry. See Keylessentry (page 41).

Perimeter alarm

Disarmand silence the alarmby unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition on,or unlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarm

Disarmand silence the alarmby unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition onwithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.

47

Alarm

Page 50: Mondeo MK3 Book

ADJUSTINGTHESTEERINGWHEEL

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.

Note:Make sure that you are sitting inthe correct position. See Sitting in thecorrect position (page 120).

1

2

2

E95178

3E95179

WARNING

Make sure that you fully engage thelocking lever when returning it to itsoriginal position.

AUDIOCONTROL

E72288

A

C

BD

E

Volume upA

Seek upB

Volume downC

Seek downD

ModeE

Mode

Press and hold the mode button toselect the audio source.

Press the mode button to:• tune the radio to the next preset

station• play the next CD

• play the other side of a cassette tape

• accept an incoming telephone call.

• end a telephone call.

48

Steeringwheel

Page 51: Mondeo MK3 Book

Seek

Press a seek button to:• tune the radio to the next station up

or down the frequency band• play the next or the previous CD track

• fast forward or rewind the cassettetape.

Press and hold a seek button to:• tune the radio up or down the

frequency band• seek through a CD track.

49

Steeringwheel

Page 52: Mondeo MK3 Book

WINDSCREENWIPERS

B

C

D

AE70696

Single wipeA

Intermittent wipeB

Normal wipeC

High speed wipeD

Intermittentwipe

E70315

BA

C

Short wipe intervalA

Intermittent wipeB

Long wipe intervalC

AUTOWIPERS

CAUTIONSDo not switch autowipers on in dryweather conditions. The rain sensoris very sensitive and the wipers may

operate if dirt, mist or flies hit thewindscreen.

Replace thewiper blades as soon asthey begin to leave bands of waterand smears. If you do not replace

them, the rain sensor will continue todetect water on the windscreen and thewipers will operate, even though themajority of the windscreen is dry.

Fully defrost the windscreen in icyconditions before you switchautowipers on.

Switch autowipers off before youenter a car wash.

E70315

BA

C

High sensitivityA

OnB

Low sensitivityC

50

Wipers andwashers

Page 53: Mondeo MK3 Book

If you switch autowipers on, the wiperswill not cycle until water is detected onthe windscreen. The rain sensor will thencontinuously measure the amount ofwater on the windscreen and adjust thespeed of the wipers automatically.

Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control. With lowsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a lot of water on thewindscreen. With high sensitivity, thewipers will operate if the sensor detectsa small amount of water on thewindscreen.

WINDSCREENWASHERS

WARNING

Do not operate the windscreenwashers for more than 10 secondsor when the reservoir is empty.

Note: The washer jets are heated whenthe ignition is on.

E70776

REARWINDOWWIPERANDWASHERS

Intermittentwipe

E70777

Reverse gearwipe

The rear window wiper will operateautomatically when you select reversegear if the wiper lever is in position B, Cor D.

Washer

WARNING

Do not operate the rear windowwasher for more than 10 secondsor when the reservoir is empty.

E70777

Pull the lever fully towards the steeringwheel and hold it to operate the washer.

51

Wipers andwashers

Page 54: Mondeo MK3 Book

HEADLAMPWASHERS

The headlamp washers will operate withthe windscreen washers when theheadlamps are on.

Note: To stop the washer fluid reservoiremptying quickly, the headlamp washerswill not operate every time that you usethe windscreen washers.

CHECKINGTHEWIPERBLADES

E66644

Run the tip of your fingers over the edgeof the blade to check for roughness.

Clean the wiper blade lips with waterapplied with a soft sponge.

CHANGINGTHEWIPERBLADES

Windscreenwiper blades

CAUTIONSSet the windscreen wipers in theservice position to change the wiperblades.

CAUTIONSYou can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access tothe wiper blades for freeing them

from snow and ice. The windscreenwipers will return to their normal positionas soon as you switch on the ignition somake sure that the outside of thewindscreen is free from snow and icebefore you switch on the ignition.

Service position

E85833

A

E75188

Switch off the ignition andmove thewiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the serviceposition.

52

Wipers andwashers

Page 55: Mondeo MK3 Book

Changing thewindscreenwiperblades

Set the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition and lift the wiper arms.

E728991

2

1. Press the locking button.

2. Remove the wiper blade.

Note:Make sure that the wiper bladelocks into place.

3. Install in the reverse order.

Rearwindowwiper blades

Changing the rearwindowwiperblades - Estate

1. Lift the wiper arm.

2

3

4

E86456

2. Position thewiper blade at right anglesto the wiper arm.

3. Disengage the wiper blade from thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Note:Make sure that the wiper bladelocks into place.

5. Install in the reverse order.

Changing the rearwindowwiperblades - 5-door

1. Lift the wiper arm.

E864572

3

2. Press the locking button.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

Note:Make sure that the wiper bladelocks into place.

4. Install in the reverse order.

53

Wipers andwashers

Page 56: Mondeo MK3 Book

LIGHTINGCONTROL

Lighting control positions

E70718

A B C

OffA

Side and tail lampsB

HeadlampsC

Parking lamps

CAUTION

Prolonged use of the parking lampswill discharge the battery.

Switch off the ignition.

Both sides

Set the lighting control to position B.

One side

E75505

A

B

Right-hand sideA

Left-hand sideB

Main and dipped beam

E70725

Pull the lever fully towards the steeringwheel to switch between main anddipped beam.

Headlamp flasher

Pull the lever slightly towards the steeringwheel.

54

Lighting

Page 57: Mondeo MK3 Book

Homesafe lighting

Switch the ignition off and pull thedirection indicator lever towards thesteering wheel to switch the headlampson. You will hear a short tone. Theheadlamps will go off automatically afterthree minutes with any door open, or 30seconds after the last door has beenclosed.

With all doors closed, but within the 30second delay, opening any doorwill resultin the three minute timer starting again.

The home safe lights can be cancelled byeither pulling the direction indicator levertowards the steering wheel again or byturning the ignition switch on.

DAYTIMERUNNINGLAMPS(DRL)

The lampswill illuminatewhen the ignitionis on.

AUTOLAMPS

E70719

Note: If you have switched autolampson, you can only switch the main beamon when autolamps has switched theheadlamps on.

The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.

AUTOMATICMAINBEAMCONTROL

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.

A manual override may be requiredwhen approaching other road userssuch as cyclists.

Do not use the system in fog.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weatherconditions the system may notfunction. A manual override may be

necessary in these cases.

Reflective road signs may bedetected as oncoming traffic and theheadlamps may be switched to

dipped beam.

If the lights of oncoming vehicles arehidden by obstacles (for exampleguard rails) the system may not

deactivate the main beam.

Always fit Ford Original Parts whenreplacing headlamp bulbs. Otherbulbs may reduce system

performance.

Check and replace wiper bladesregularly to ensure the camerasensor has a clear view through the

windscreen. Replacement wiper bladesmust be the correct length.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings,insects and snow or ice.

55

Lighting

Page 58: Mondeo MK3 Book

The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and noother traffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.

A camera sensor is centrally mountedbehind thewindscreen of the vehicle, andmonitors conditions continuously todecidewhen to switch themain beamoffand on.

Once the system is active themain beamwill switch on if:• It is dark enough to require the use of

main beams and• there is no traffic or street lighting

ahead and• vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h

(25 mph).

The main beam will switch off if:• The ambient light is high enough that

main beam is not required.• An approaching vehicle's headlamps

or tail lamps are detected.• Street lighting is detected.

• Vehicle speed falls below 25 km/h (16mph).

• The camera sensor is too hot orbecomes blocked.

Activating the system

Switch on the system using theinformation display and autolamps. SeeInformation displays (page 84). SeeAutolamps (page 55).

E70719

Turn the switch to the autolamps position.

Note: The systemmay take a short timeto initialise after first switching the ignitionon, especially in very dark conditions. Themain beam will not automatically switchon during this period.

Setting the systemsensitivity

The system has three sensitivity levelswhich can be accessed via theinformation display. See Informationdisplays (page 84).

The sensitivity determines the speed atwhich themain beamwill be restored afterdetected traffic leaves the field of view.

Manuallyoverridingthesystem

E70725

Use the main beam lever to switchbetween main beam and dipped beam.

56

Lighting

Page 59: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: This is a temporary override andthe system will return to automaticoperation after a short period.

To permanently deactivate the systemuse the information display menu or turnthe lighting control switch fromautolampsto headlamps.

FRONT FOGLAMPS

E70721

WARNING

Only use the front fog lamps whenvisibility is considerably restricted byfog, snow or rain.

REARFOGLAMPS

E70720

WARNINGSOnly use the rear fog lamps whenvisibility is restricted to less than 50metres.

WARNINGSDonot use the rear fog lampswhenit is raining or snowing and visibilityis more than 50 metres.

ADJUSTINGTHEHEADLAMPS - VEHICLESWITH: ADAPTIVE FRONTLIGHTING/XENONHEADLAMPS

To adjust the headlamps for driving on theleft or right hand side of the road, see yourdealer.

HEADLAMPLEVELLING

Note: Vehicles with Xenon headlampsare equipped with automatic headlamplevelling.

E70722A B

Raised headlamp beamsA

Lowered headlamp beamsB

You can adjust the level of the headlampbeams according to the vehicle load.

57

Lighting

Page 60: Mondeo MK3 Book

Recommended headlamp levelling switch positions

Switch positionLoad in luggagecompartment

Load

Second rowseatsFront seats

0--1-2

0 (0.52)--1-2

1 (0.52)-31-2

3 (0.52)Max131-2

4 (1.52)Max1-1

1 See Vehicle identification (page 239).2 Vehicles with active suspension.

HAZARDWARNINGFLASHERS

Note:Depending on applicable laws andregulations in the country for which yourvehicle was originally built, the hazardwarning flashers may flash if you brakeheavily.

E71943

For item location: SeeQuickstart (page11).

58

Lighting

Page 61: Mondeo MK3 Book

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTINGSYSTEM (AFS)

E72897

A

B

A

B

without AFSA

with AFSB

The AFS adjusts the headlamp dippedbeamdepending on vehicle direction andspeed. It improves visibility when you aredriving at night and helps to reduceheadlamp glare for oncoming drivers.

The system will not operate when thevehicle is stationary, when you haveswitched on the daytime running lampsor when you have selected reverse gear.

A message will appear in the informationdisplay if the system malfunctions. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).The headlampswill move to a fixed centralor dipped position. Have the systemchecked as soon as possible.

59

Lighting

Page 62: Mondeo MK3 Book

Cornering lamps

E72898

B

A

B

A

Headlamp beamA

Cornering lamp beamB

The cornering lamps illuminate the insideof a corner when you are turning.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E70727

Note: Tap the lever up or down to makethe direction indicators flash only threetimes.

60

Lighting

Page 63: Mondeo MK3 Book

INTERIOR LAMPS

Courtesy lamp

CBA

E71945

OffA

Door contactB

OnC

If you set the switch to position B, thecourtesy lamp will come on when youunlock or open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, the courtesylamp will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch it back on, switchon the ignition for a short time.

The courtesy lampwill also comeonwhenyou switch off the ignition. It will go offautomatically after a short time or whenyou start or restart the engine.

If you set the switch to positionCwith theignition switch off, the courtesy lamp willcome on. It will go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging. To switch it back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

Reading lamps

E71946

If you switch off the ignition, the readinglamps will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

LED interior lighting

B

A

E131657

Individual lampon andoff switchA

Master on and off switchB

You can control all lamps using switch B.

Note: If all lamps have been switched onby the driver's control, they cannot beswitched off independently.

61

Lighting

Page 64: Mondeo MK3 Book

The lamps will come on when you unlockor open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, all lamps willgo off automatically after some time toprevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

If you press and hold switch B for 3seconds all lamps will stay off regardlessof the doors or luggage compartment lidposition. Press the switch briefly again toreverse.

Vanitymirror lamps

A

B

E72900

OffA

OnB

If you switch off the ignition, the vanitymirror lampswill go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging. To switch them backon, switch on the ignition for a short time.

REMOVINGAHEADLAMP

WARNING

Have Xenon bulbs changed by atrained technician. There is a risk ofelectric shock.

1. Open thebonnet. SeeOpeningandclosing the bonnet (page 206).

E85995

2. Remove the screws.

E88843

3. Remove the plastic screw andretainer.

62

Lighting

Page 65: Mondeo MK3 Book

5

4E85996

4. Carefully pull the corner of the grilleand bumper towards the front of thevehicle.

5. Carefully lift the corner of theheadlamp and push it as far aspossible towards the back of thevehicle.

7

6

E88982

6. Carefully pull the headlamp towardsthe centre of the vehicle, behind thegrille and bumper, to disengage it fromthe lower outer fixing point.

7. Remove the headlamp.

CAUTION

When fitting the headlamp, take carenot to damage the locating points.

Note:When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you fully engage the headlampin the lower outer fixing point.

Note:When fitting the headlamp, tightenthe front screw first and then the rearscrew.

CHANGINGABULB

WARNINGSSwitch the lights and the ignition off.

Let the bulb cool down beforeremoving it.

Have Xenon bulbs changed by atrained technician. There is a risk ofelectric shock.

CAUTIONSDo not touch the glass of the bulb.

Only fit bulbs of the correctspecification. See Bulbspecification chart (page 69).

Note: The following instructions describehow to remove the bulbs. Fitreplacements in the reverse order unlessotherwise stated.

Headlamp

Note:Remove the covers to gain accessto the bulbs.

Direction indicator

1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemovingaheadlamp (page 62).

63

Lighting

Page 66: Mondeo MK3 Book

E72259

2

3

2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

Headlampmain beam

1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemovingaheadlamp (page 62).

E72261

3

2

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Headlampdipped beam

1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemovingaheadlamp (page 62).

E72260

3

2

2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

3. Remove the bulb.

Cornering lamp

1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemovingaheadlamp (page 62).

E72262

3

2

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Daytime running lamps

Note: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

64

Lighting

Page 67: Mondeo MK3 Book

E131653

Side repeater

E72263

1. Carefully remove the side repeater.

E72291

2. Remove the bulb holder.

3. Remove the bulb.

Approach lamp

Note: Position the mirror glass as farinwards as possible.

E72264

1

1. Insert a screwdriver into the gapbetween the mirror housing and themirror glass and release the metalretaining clip.

E72265

2

3

2. Remove the lamp.

3. Remove the bulb.

65

Lighting

Page 68: Mondeo MK3 Book

Front fog lamps

E72267

3

2

4

1

Note: You cannot separate the fog lampbulb from the bulb holder.

Note: Do not remove the screws.

1. Loosen the screws.

2. Remove the lamp.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

Rear lamps

Direction indicator

E86003

1

1. Remove the trim panel.

E131687

2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise and removeit.

Tail and brake lamp

Note: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

66

Lighting

Page 69: Mondeo MK3 Book

Reversing lampand fog lamp

1

E86006

1. Remove the trim panel.

E131688

2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise and removeit.

Central highmounted brakelamp

Note: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

Number plate lamp

E72789

3

2

1

1. Carefully release the spring clip.

2. Remove the lamp.

3. Remove the bulb.

Interior lamps

Vehicleswith LED lamps

Note: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

E131655

67

Lighting

Page 70: Mondeo MK3 Book

Vehicleswithout interior sensors

3

2

E72788

1. Carefully prise out the lens.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the bulb.

Vehicleswith interior sensors

E72787

2

3

1. Carefully prise out the lens.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the bulb.

Reading lamps

Vehicleswithout interior sensors

E72796

33

2

1. Carefully prise out the lens.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the bulb.

Vehicleswith interior sensors

E72786

22

1

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.

2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

68

Lighting

Page 71: Mondeo MK3 Book

E739393

3. Remove the bulb.

Vanitymirror lamp

E72785

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.

2. Remove the bulb.

Luggage compartment lamp

E72784

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.

2. Remove the bulb.

BULBSPECIFICATIONCHART

Power (watt)SpecificationLamp

21PY21WFront direction indicator

55H1Headlamp main beam

55H7Headlamp dipped beam

55H1Cornering lamp

5W5WSide repeater

5W5WApproach lamp

35H8Front fog lamp

5W5WSide lamp

69

Lighting

Page 72: Mondeo MK3 Book

Power (watt)SpecificationLamp

21PY21WRear direction indicator

21H21WRear fog lamp

21P21WReversing lamp

5W5WNumber plate lamp

10FestoonInterior lamp

5BA9sReading lamp

5W5WVanity mirror lamp

6W6WLuggage compartment lamp

70

Lighting

Page 73: Mondeo MK3 Book

ELECTRICWINDOWS

WARNING

Donot operate the electricwindowsunless they are free fromobstruction.

Note: If you operate the switches oftenduring a short period of time, the systemmight become inoperable for a certaintime to prevent damage due tooverheating.

Note: You can operate the windows forseveral minutes after you switch off theignition. They will be deactivated as soonas a door is opened.

Note: If you operate both the switch onthe relevant door and the switch for thatwindow on the driver’s door at the sametime, the window will stop moving.

Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric windows.

Global opening and globalclosing

You can also operate the electricwindowswith the ignition off via the globalopening and global closing function. SeeGlobal opening and closing (page39).

Note:Global opening and global closingwill open or close the windowsautomatically only on vehicles equippedwith four electric windows.

Note: Global closing will only operate ifyou have set the memory correctly foreach window.

Driver’s door switches

E121510

You can operate all the windows with theswitches on the door trim panel of thedriver’s door.

Front and rear passengers’door switches

E70849

Opening and closing thewindows automatically

Press or lift the switch to the secondaction point and release it. Press or lift itagain to stop the windows.

71

Windows andmirrors

Page 74: Mondeo MK3 Book

Safetyswitchforrearwindows

WARNING

On some vehicles, pressing theswitch will also lock the rear doorsfrom inside. See Child safety

locks (page 27).

Note: You can always operate the rearwindows from the driver’s door.

E121511

A switch in the driver’s door disables therear electric window switches.

The light in the switch illuminates and thelights in the rear window switches go offwhen the rear windows are disabled.

Anti-trap function

WARNING

Careless closingof thewindowscanoverride the protection function andcause injuries.

The electric windows will stopautomatically while closing and reversesome distance if there is an obstacle inthe way.

Overriding the anti-trap function

CAUTION

While you close the window for thethird time, the anti-trap function isdisabled. Make sure there are no

obstacles in the way of the closingwindow.

To override this protection function whenthere is a resistance, for example, in thewinter, proceed as follows:

1. Close the window twice until itreaches the resistance and let itreverse.

2. Close the window a third time to theresistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and you cannot close thewindowautomatically. Thewindowwilloverride the resistance and you canclose it fully.

3. If the window does not close after thethird attempt, have it checked by aproperly trained technician.

Resetting thememory of theelectricwindows

WARNING

The anti-trap function is deactivateduntil you have reset the memory.

After the battery has been disconnectedfrom the vehicle you must reset thememory separately for each window:

1. Lift the switch until the window is fullyclosed. Hold the switch lifted for onemore second.

2. Release the switch and lift it again, twoor three times, for one more second.

3. Open the window and try to close itautomatically.

4. Reset and repeat procedure if thewindow does not close automatically.

72

Windows andmirrors

Page 75: Mondeo MK3 Book

Safetymode

WARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure.

If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The windows willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop again. Close the windowsby pressing the switch again when thewindows stopmoving. Have this checkedimmediately.

EXTERIORMIRRORS

WARNING

Do not overestimate the distanceof the objects that you see in theconvex mirror. Objects seen in

convex mirrors will appear smaller andfurther away than they actually are.

Manual foldingmirrors

Folding

Push themirror towards the doorwindowglass.

Unfolding

Make sure that you fully engage themirrorin its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

ELECTRIC EXTERIORMIRRORS

A CB

E70846

Left-hand mirrorA

OffB

Right-hand mirrorC

Mirror tilting positions

E70847

The electric exteriormirrors are fittedwitha heating element that will defrost ordemist the mirror glass. See Heatedwindows andmirrors (page 112).

73

Windows andmirrors

Page 76: Mondeo MK3 Book

Electric foldingmirrors

Automatic folding and unfolding

Note: If the mirrors have been foldedusing themanual fold button they can onlybe unfolded using themanual fold button.

The mirrors will fold automatically whenyou lock the vehicle with the key, theremote control or a keyless entry systemrequest. Themirrors will unfold when youunlock the vehicle with the key, theremote control, a keyless entry systemrequest, the driver's interior door handleor starting the engine.

Manual folding and unfolding

The electric folding mirrors operate withthe ignition on.

Note:Youcanoperate themirrors (mirrortilting and folding) for severalminutes afteryou switch off the ignition. They will bedeactivated as soon as a door is opened.

E72623

Press the button to fold or unfold themirrors.

If you press the switch again while themirrors are moving, they will stop andreverse the direction of movement.

Note:When the mirrors are operatedoften during a short period of time, thesystem may become inoperable for aperiod of time to prevent damage due tooverheating.

Reversemirror dipping

Depending on the switch position (A orC), the relevant exterior mirror will dipwhenever you select reverse gear, givingyou a view of the kerb.

Note: You can disable this feature byleaving the switch in position B.The exterior mirror will return to theoriginal position:• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h

(6 mph).• Approximately 10 seconds after

reverse gear has been disengaged.• If the switch is returned to position B.

When you first use this feature, themirrorwill dip to a preset position. This positioncan be adjusted using the followingsequence:

1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start theengine.

2. Select the desired exterior mirror (Aor C).

3. Select reverse gear, the selectedexterior mirror will adjust to a presetposition.

4. Adjust the mirror to the requireddipped position.

5. Disengage reverse gear or press andhold the desired memory pre-setbutton until a single chime sounds toconfirm. SeeMemory function(page 129).

The settings will be stored automatically.

74

Windows andmirrors

Page 77: Mondeo MK3 Book

AUTO-DIMMINGMIRROR

E71028

The auto-dimming mirror will adjustautomaticallywhen hit by glaring light frombehind. It will not work when you haveselected reverse gear.

BLINDSPOTMONITOR

Blind spot information system(BLIS)

WARNINGSThe system is not designed toprevent contact with other vehiclesor objects. The system only

provides a warning to assist you indetecting vehicles in the blind spot zones.The system will not detect obstacles,pedestrians or cyclists.

Do not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over

your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system is a convenience feature thataids the driver in detecting vehicles thatmay have entered the blind spot zone (A).The detection area is on both sides of thevehicle extending rearwards from theexteriormirrors to approximately 3metres(10 feet) beyond the bumper. The systemwill alert you if certain vehicles enter theblind spot zone whilst driving.

A

A

E124788

Using the system

The system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.

E124736

Note:Both indicatorswill illuminate brieflywhen you switch the ignition on to confirmthat the system is operational.

Note: On vehicles with automatictransmission, the system is active only inD and N.The system is only active when youexceed 10 km/h (6 mph). The system istemporarily deactivated when you selectreverse gear.

75

Windows andmirrors

Page 78: Mondeo MK3 Book

Systemdetection and alerts

The system will trigger the alert forvehicles that enter the blind spot zonefrom the rear or merge from the side.Vehicles that you pass, or vehicles thatenter the blind spot zone from the front,will only trigger the alert after the vehiclehas remained in the blind spot zone for ashort period of time.

Note: Vehicles that pass through theblind zone quickly (typically less than 2seconds) will not trigger the alert.

The systemconsists of two radar sensorseach located behind the rear wheelshidden behind the bumpers.

CAUTIONSDo not place items such as bumperstickers in this area.

Repairs to these areas using bodyfiller will affect the performance of thesystem.

E124741

Detection limitations

There may be certain instances wherevehicles entering andexiting the blind spotzones may not be detected.

Instances which may causenon-detection:• Debris build up on the rear bumper

panels in the area of the sensors.• Certain manoeuvring of vehicles

entering and exiting the blind zone.• Vehicles passing through the blind

zone at high speed.• Severe weather conditions.

• Several vehicles passing through theblind zone following each otherclosely.

False alerts

Note: False alerts are temporary and willself correct.

Theremay be certain instanceswhen thesystem will alert with no vehicle presentin the blind zone.

Circumstances where false alerts mayoccur:• Road guardrails.

• Motorway concrete walls.

• Construction areas.

• Sharp turns around a building.

• Bushes and trees.

• Coming to a stop with a vehicledirectly behind but very close.

Turning the systemon and off

Note: The on or off position will remainuntil manually changed.

You can turn the system on and off usingthe information display. SeeInformation displays (page 84).

When you turn the system off no furtheralerts will be received. The BLIS warningindicator will illuminate. SeeWarninglamps and indicators (page 80).

76

Windows andmirrors

Page 79: Mondeo MK3 Book

Detection errors

Note: The alert indicator in the mirror willnot illuminate.

If the system senses a fault on eithersensor, the system warning symbol willilluminate and remain on. The informationdisplay will confirm the fault and indicatewhether the left or right side is affected.

Blocked sensor

WARNING

Prior to the system recognizing ablocked condition and issuing awarning, the number of missed

objects will increase.

CAUTION

The sensorsmay not detect vehiclesin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.

Note: Keep the rear bumper areasurrounding the sensors free fromdirt, iceand snow.

If a sensor becomes blocked the systemperformance may degrade. A blockedsensor message may be displayed.

The system will automatically return tonormal operation once twoother vehicleshave been detected on both sides.

Trailer towing false alerts

CAUTION

Vehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by usmay notcorrectly be detected. Switch the

system off to avoid false alerts. SeeInformation displays (page 84).

If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer towmodule approved by us, the system willdetect a connected trailer and deactivate.A confirmation message will be shown inthe information display. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).The BLIS warning indicator will illuminate.SeeWarning lamps and indicators(page 80).

77

Windows andmirrors

Page 80: Mondeo MK3 Book

GAUGES

Type 1 and2

BA C D

E72984

TachometerA

Engine coolant temperature gaugeB

Fuel gaugeC

SpeedometerD

78

Instruments

Page 81: Mondeo MK3 Book

Type3

A B

CDEE130765

TachometerA

SpeedometerB

Engine coolant temperature gaugeC

Fuel gaugeD

Message centre. See Information displays (page 84).E

Engine coolant temperaturegauge

Note: On type 3 this gauge is shownwithin themessage centre andwill not bedisplayed unless required. SeeInformation displays (page 84).Shows the temperature of the enginecoolant. At normal operating temperature,the indicator will remain in the centresection.

CAUTION

Do not restart the engine until thecause of overheating has beenresolved.

If the indicatormoves towards 120°C, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooleddown. See Engine coolant check(page 216).

79

Instruments

Page 82: Mondeo MK3 Book

Fuel gauge

Note: On type 3 this gauge is shownwithin the message centre.

The arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol tells you on which side of yourvehicle the fuel filler cap is located.

WARNINGLAMPSANDINDICATORS

The following warning lamps andindicators will illuminate briefly when youswitch the ignition on to confirm that thesystem is operational:• ABS

• Airbag

• Blind spot monitor

• Brake system

• Coolant temperature

• Engine

• Frost

• Ignition

• Oil pressure

• Stability control (ESP).

If a warning or indicator lamp does notilluminate when the ignition is switchedon, it indicates a malfunction. Have thesystem checked by properly trainedtechnician.

ABSwarning lamp

If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have normal braking (without ABS).Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible.

Airbagwarning lamp

If it illuminates while driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Havethe system checked by a

properly trained technician.

Blind spotmonitor indicator

E124823

It will illuminatewhen this featureis switched off or in conjunctionwith a message. See Blind

spotmonitor (page 75). SeeInformationmessages (page 97).

Brake system lamp

It illuminates when the parkingbrake is engaged.

WARNING

Reduce your speed gradually andstop your vehicle as soon as it issafe to do so. Use your brakes with

care.

If it illuminateswhen you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates amalfunction. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianimmediately.

Coolant temperaturewarninglamp

CAUTION

Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have the system checked

by a properly trained technicianimmediately.

80

Instruments

Page 83: Mondeo MK3 Book

If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check thecoolant level. See Engine coolantcheck (page 216).

Direction indicators

Flashes during operation. Asudden increase in the rate offlashing warns of a failed

indicator bulb. See Changing a bulb(page 63).

Enginewarning lamp

If it illuminates with the enginerunning, this indicates amalfunction. If it flashes when

you are driving, reduce the speed ofyour vehicle immediately. If itcontinues to flash, avoid heavyacceleration or deceleration. Have thesystem checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.

CAUTION

If the enginewarning lamp illuminatesin conjunction with a message, havethe system checked as soon as

possible.

Forward alert indicator

E124824

It will illuminatewhen this featureis switched off. See Forwardalert function (page 168).

Front fog lamp indicator

It will illuminatewhen you switchthe front fog lamps on.

Frostwarning lamp

WARNING

Even if the temperature rises toabove 4ºC (39.2°F) there is noguarantee that the road is free of

hazards caused by inclement weather.

It will illuminate and glow orangewhen the outside airtemperature is between 4ºC

(39.2ºF) and 0ºC (32ºF). It will glow redwhen the temperature is below 0ºC(32ºF).

Glowplug indicator

SeeStartingadieselengine(page 136).

Headlamp indicator

It will illuminatewhen you switchthe headlamp dipped beam orthe side and tail lamps on.

Ignitionwarning lamp

If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Switch off all

unnecessary electrical equipment. Havethe systemchecked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.

Lane departurewarningindicator

It will illuminatewhen this featureis switched off or in conjunctionwith a message. The indicator

will go out when you switch the systemback on or when you switch the ignitionoff. See Lane departurewarning(page 174). See Informationmessages (page 97).

81

Instruments

Page 84: Mondeo MK3 Book

Low fuel level warning lamp

If it illuminates, refuel as soon aspossible.

Main beam indicator

It will illuminatewhen you switchthe headlamp main beam on. Itwill flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Message indicator

It will illuminate when a newmessage is stored in theinformation display. See

Informationmessages (page 97).

Oil pressurewarning lamp

CAUTION

Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have the system checked

by a properly trained technicianimmediately.

If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine oil check(page 216).

Rear fog lamp indicator

It will illuminatewhen you switchthe rear fog lamps on.

Seat belt reminder

See Seat belt reminder(page 32).

Shift indicator

It will illuminate to inform youthat shifting to a higher gearmay give better fuel economy

and lower CO2 emissions. It will notilluminate during periods of highacceleration, braking or when the clutchpedal is pressed.

Stability control (ESP)warninglamp

While driving, it flashes duringactivation of the system. Afterswitching on the ignition, if it

does not illuminate or illuminatescontinuously while driving, this indicatesa malfunction. During a malfunction, thesystem switches off. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.

If you switch ESP off, the warning lampwill illuminate. The lamp will go out whenyou switch the system back on or whenyou switch the ignition off.

AUDIBLEWARNINGSANDINDICATORS

Switching the chimes on andoff

You can deactivate certain chimes.

To set which chimes should sound:

82

Instruments

Page 85: Mondeo MK3 Book

E70499

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightChimes and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight the chime and press theOKbutton to switch the chime on and off.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Press and hold the left arrowbutton to return to the main menudisplay.

83

Instruments

Page 86: Mondeo MK3 Book

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Do not operate the informationdisplay controls when the vehicle ismoving.

Note: The information display will remainon for several minutes after you switch offthe ignition.

Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the buttons on yoursteering wheel. Correspondinginformation is displayed in the informationdisplay.

For detailed instructions on audio,navigation, phone etc. refer to theappropriate manual.

Controls

E70499

Press the up and down arrow buttons:

• to scroll through the trip computerdisplays

• to scroll through and highlight theoptions within a menu.

Press the right arrow button:

• to enter the main menu from the tripcomputer displays

• to enter a sub-menu.

Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.

Hold the left arrowbutton pressed at anytime to return to the main menu display(escape button).

Note: The system will return to the tripcomputer displays automatically if you donot press any button for a period of time.

Press theOK button to choose andconfirm a setting.

Instrument cluster functions

Type3Type2Type 1Function

XXXTrip computer

XXXInformation messages

XXXClock setup

XX-Display settings

XX-Park heater setup

84

Information displays

Page 87: Mondeo MK3 Book

Type3Type2Type 1Function

X--Navigation control

X--CD control

X--CD changer control

X--Radio control

X--Phone control

X--Auxiliary input control

Type 1

E80604

Press the up and down arrow buttonson the steering wheel to scroll throughthe trip computer displays. See Tripcomputer (page 93).

85

Information displays

Page 88: Mondeo MK3 Book

Menu structure

Information

Reset trip

BLIS

ECO MODE

Trip OdoAvg FuelAvg SpeedAll values

Messages

Gear ShiftingAnticipationSpeedFor more Info

Clock Set Clock24 Hour Mode12 Hour ModeE131626

Type2

E74426

6.3Average Fuel

09:00

234.2 km

123456 km

l100km

Press the up and down arrow buttonson the steering wheel to scroll throughthe trip computer displays. See Tripcomputer (page 93).

86

Information displays

Page 89: Mondeo MK3 Book

Menu structure

Reset Trip

BLISESP

Trip OdoAvg fuelAvg speedAll

Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedFor more Info

EnglishDeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski

PortuguêsSvenska

Configure

Language

Measure unit

Display

Set Clock24 Hour Mode12 Hour Mode

Always offOn guidanceAlways on

MessagesTyre Press.

MetricImperial

Help ScreenRadio InfoPhone InfoNAV info

Information

Clock

Setup

ECO MODE

BAE131627

87

Information displays

Page 90: Mondeo MK3 Book

Chimes

Forw Alert

Low Fuel

Home lightGeneral warn.General info.

Low

OffHighNormal

Off

ManualAuto

Hill Launch

Check

High loadLow load

Tyre Pressure

Full guard

Ask on exitReduced

Alarm

Aux. Heater

Parkheater

BA

E87753

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

FridayThursday

MondayTuesdayWednesday

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

FridayThursday

MondayTuesdayWednesday

Time 1

Time 2

OnceActive now

88

Information displays

Page 91: Mondeo MK3 Book

Type3

E88048

Use the controls to scroll through themenu displays.

Device list

The highlighted icon shows the currentmenu in use.

Navigation

CD

CD changer

Radio

Phone

Trip computer

Settings

Auxiliary input

89

Information displays

Page 92: Mondeo MK3 Book

Menu structure

CD

Navigation HomeDestinat. mem.Destinat. A-ZLast destinat.Cancel guidan.

DestinationsDestinationsDestinations

Folder / Tracks

Folder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / Tracks

StationsStationsStationsStationsStationsStationsStations

Numbers

NumbersNumbers

Station listFM 1 / FMFM 2FM 3FM - ASTMW / AMLW / AM-AST

CD changer CD 1CD 2CD 3CD 4CD 5CD 6

Radio

Phone bookRedialIncoming callsOutgoing callsCall status

Phone

AE131628

Trip computer Distance to emptyAverage fuelAverage speedReset selected elementReset trip odometer

90

Information displays

Page 93: Mondeo MK3 Book

English

Colour themesConfigure

Language

Measure unit

DisplayDriver alert

Set Clock24-hour mode12-hour mode

Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedMore info

Always offOn guidanceAlways on

Messages

Tyre PressureCoolant temperature

Driver alert

MetricImperial

Help ScreenNAV info

Settings

Information

Clock

Setup

ESPBLISECOMODE

A CBE131629

A

DeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski

PortuguêsSvenska

91

Information displays

Page 94: Mondeo MK3 Book

Chimes Low Fuel

Home lightGeneral warn.General info.

Forw Alert LowNormalHighOff

Lane depart Sensitivity NormalHigh

Intensity HighNormalLow

Off

ManualAuto

Hill Launch

Check

High loadLow load

Tyre Pressure

Full guard

Ask on exitReduced

Alarm

Aux Heater

Auto beam OnSensitivity High

NormalLow

C

E131630

92

Information displays

Page 95: Mondeo MK3 Book

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

WednesdayTuesday

FridayThursday

Monday

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

WednesdayTuesday

FridayThursday

Monday

Time 1

Time 2

OnceActive now

Park heater

Auxiliary input

BA

E88067

TRIPCOMPUTER

Odometer

Registers the total mileage of the vehicle.

Tripmeter

Registers the mileage of individualjourneys.

Distance to empty

Indicates the approximate distance thevehicle will travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank. Changes in driving pattern maycause the value to vary.

Average fuel consumption

Indicates the average fuel consumptionsince the function was last reset.

Average speed

Indicates the average speed calculatedsince the function was last reset.

Outside air temperature

Shows the outside air temperature.

93

Information displays

Page 96: Mondeo MK3 Book

Type 1 and2

E74428

6.3Average Fuel

10:20

234.2 km

123456 km

l100km

A

B

C

A. Trip computerB. OdometerC. Tripmeter

The trip computer includes the followinginformation displays:

Average fuel

Average speed

Outside air

Reset Trip

Dist. to empty

E74441

Press the up and down arrow buttonson the steering wheel to scroll throughthe trip computer displays.

Note: The position of the trip computerdisplay may vary depending on theinformation shown in the display.

Resetting the trip computer usingthemainmenu

To reset a particular display:

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. Highlight Reset Tripwith the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

3. Highlight the function to be reset.

4. Press the right arrow button to selectthe function.

5. Hold theOK button pressed.

To reset all three displays, select Allvalues and hold theOK button pressed.

Type3

E88049A

Trip computerA

Press theOK button on the steeringwheel to cycle through the different tripcomputer displays. To reset a value, pressand hold theOK button.

Resetting the trip computer usingthemainmenu

To reset a particular display:

1. HighlightTripComputerwith the upand down arrow buttons and pressthe right arrow button.

94

Information displays

Page 97: Mondeo MK3 Book

2. Highlight the function to be reset.

3. Hold theOK button pressed.

PERSONALISEDSETTINGS

The following information is displayed inthe information display if you haveselected it:

Help screen, radio, navigationand phone information

The help screen appears for a fewsecondswhen you switch the ignition on.

If the radio, navigation or telephone isoperating, information relating to thissystem is displayed in the informationdisplay.

To select which information is displayedin the information display:

Type 1 and2

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Configure and press theright arrow button.

5. To toggle the Help screen, RadioInfo and Phone Info on and off,highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.

Type3

1. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Configure and press theright arrow button.

5. To toggle theHelpscreen andNAVInfo on and off, highlight the desiredsetting and press theOK button toconfirm the setting.

Navigation information

You can also choosewhen the navigationinformation is displayed in the informationdisplay. Three options are available:

• Always off: No navigationinformation is displayed in theinformation display.

• Onguidance: The navigationinformation will only appear when thenavigation system provides aguidance instruction. This function isonly available on certain navigationsystems.

• Always on: Navigation informationwill always appear in the informationdisplay when the navigation system isoperating.

To setwhennavigation information shouldbe displayed:

Type 1 and2

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

95

Information displays

Page 98: Mondeo MK3 Book

3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Configure and press theright arrow button.

5. HighlightNavInfo and press the rightarrow button.

6. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

7. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.

Type3

1. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Configure and press theright arrow button.

5. HighlightNavInfo and press the rightarrow button.

6. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

Language

A choice of eleven languages areavailable:

English, German, Italian, French, Spanish,Turkish, Russian, Dutch, Polish, Swedishand Portuguese.

Type 1 and2

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Language and press theright arrow button.

5. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.

Type3

1. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Language and press theright arrow button.

5. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

Units ofmeasure

Note: The outside air temperature is onlydisplayed in degrees Celsius and cannotbe set to degrees Fahrenheit.

To select metric or imperial units:

Type 1 and2

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

96

Information displays

Page 99: Mondeo MK3 Book

3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.

4. HighlightMeasureUnit and pressthe right arrow button.

5. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

6. Press the left arrow button to returnto exit the menu. Hold the left arrowbutton pressed to return to the tripcomputer display.

Type3

1. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.

4. HighlightMeasureUnit and pressthe right arrow button.

5. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

INFORMATIONMESSAGES

E70499

PressOK to acknowledge and removesome messages from the informationdisplay. Other messages will be removedautomatically after a short time.

With instrument cluster type 3, certainmessages need to be confirmed beforeyou can access the menus.

Message indicator

The message indicatorilluminates to supplement somemessages. It will be red or

amber depending on the severity of themessage and will remain on until thecause of themessage has been rectified.

Message symbols

See Owner’s handbook.

Have the system checked atthe next service.

Have the system checked assoon as possible.

Stop your vehicle as soon as itis safe to do so.

Viewing currentmessages

Type 1 and2

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. Highlight Information with the upand down arrow buttons and pressthe right arrow button.

3. HighlightMessages and press theright arrow button.

4. Use the up and down buttons to viewthe current messages.

Type3

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

97

Information displays

Page 100: Mondeo MK3 Book

2. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

3. Highlight Information with the upand down arrow buttons and pressthe right arrow button.

4. HighlightMessages and press theright arrow button.

5. Use the up and down buttons to viewthe current messages.

Active suspension

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.

amberIVDC malfunction

See Active suspension (page 156).-IVDC comfort

See Active suspension (page 156).-IVDC normal

See Active suspension (page 156).-IVDC sport

Airbag

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberAirbag malfunction

Alarm

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Alarm (page 45).amberAlarm triggered

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.

-Alarm systemservice reqd.

Automaticmain beamcontrol/Lane departurewarning/Driveralert

ActionIndicatorMessage

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility.Clean the windscreen.

amberFront cameraClean screen

98

Information displays

Page 101: Mondeo MK3 Book

ActionIndicatorMessage

The front camera sensor has malfunctioned.Have this checked as soon as possible.

amberFront cameramalfunction

The affected systems are temporarily unavail-able, and should resume after a few minutes.

amberFront cameranot available

Take a rest break soon.amberDriver fatigueRest suggested

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.redDriver fatigueRest now

The system has malfunctioned. Have thischecked as soon as possible.

amberLane departurewarn. malfunct.

Battery and charging system

ActionIndicatorMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch off the ignition. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technician as

soon as possible.

red

Overvoltage: Stopsafely!

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberLow battery

Blind spotmonitor

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Blind spotmonitor (page 75).amberBLIS sensorblocked

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS right sensor

malfunction

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS left sensor

malfunction

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS malfunction

See Blind spotmonitor (page 75).amberBLIS inactive Trailerattach'd

99

Information displays

Page 102: Mondeo MK3 Book

Child power lock

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberChild lockmalfunc-

tion

Climate control

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Auxiliary heater (page 112).amberAux. Heater on

Cruise control andAdaptive cruise control (ACC)

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Cruise control (page 162).-Cruise controlactive

See Cruise control (page 162).-Cruise controlstandby

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page164).

-ACC unavailable

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberACC malfunction

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page164).

amberClean radar sensor

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberForward Alertmalfunction

Doors open

ActionIndicatorMessage

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.

redDriver door open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.

redDriver side reardoor open

100

Information displays

Page 103: Mondeo MK3 Book

ActionIndicatorMessage

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.

redPassenger dooropen

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.

redPassenger siderear door open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.

redLuggage comp.open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close. SeeOpening and

closing the bonnet (page 206).

redBonnet open

Engine immobiliser

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Engine immobiliser (page 44).amberImmobiliser active

Hill start assist

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.

amberHill Launch notavailable

See Hill start assist (page 153).-Hill Launch Assistactive

See Hill start assist (page 153).-Hill Launch Assistoff

See Hill start assist (page 153).amberPlease use parkbrake !

Keyless system

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have this checked as soon as possible.redSteering malfunc-tion

See Keyless entry (page 41).amberKey not detected

101

Information displays

Page 104: Mondeo MK3 Book

ActionIndicatorMessage

The engine is still running. Switch the ignition off.See Keyless starting (page 132).

amberCar operativePress STOP

See Keyless entry (page 41).amberKey outside car

SeeChangingtheremotecontrolbattery(page 34).

amberKey battery low

See Steeringwheel lock (page 134).-Steering locked -Retry

Lighting

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberFront lightsmalfunction

One or both of the headlamp dipped beambulbs have blown. Check the headlamp dippedbeambulbs. SeeChangingabulb (page63).

-Low beam: Bulbfault

One or both of the rear fog lamp bulbs haveblown. Check the rear fog lamp bulbs. See

Changing a bulb (page 63).

-Rear fog light: Bulbfault

Oneor both of the brake lampbulbs haveblown.Check the brake lamp bulbs. See Changing

a bulb (page 63).

-Stop lamps: Bulbfault

One or both of the brake lamp bulbs on yourtrailer have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs

on your trailer.

-Trailer stopl.: Bulbfault

One or both of the direction indicator bulbs onyour trailer have blown. Check the direction

indicator bulbs on your trailer.

-Trailer turnl.: Bulbfault

Maintenance

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

redEnginemalfunction

102

Information displays

Page 105: Mondeo MK3 Book

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Engine oil check (page 216).amberCheck engine oillevel

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberWater detected infuel

SeeWasher fluid check (page 218).-Low washer fluidlevel

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.

-Service oil

Occupant protection

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

-Crash mode

Parking brake

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Parking brake (page 150).redPark brake applied

See Parking brake (page 150).amberPark brake applied

Power steering

ActionIndicatorMessage

Full steering will bemaintained but youwill needto exert greater force on the steering wheel.Have the system checked by a properly trained

technician as soon as possible.

amberPower steeringmalfunction

103

Information displays

Page 106: Mondeo MK3 Book

Stability control (ESP)

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

-ESP malfunction

See Using stability control (page 151).-ESP off

Transmission

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.

redTransmissionmalfunction

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberTransmission over-temperatur

Tyre pressuremonitoring system

ActionIndicatorMessage

The tyre indicated has continued to deflate.Check the tyre and inflate it to the recom-

mendedpressure. SeeTechnicalspecifica-tions (page 235).

redCheck ..... tyre!

One ormore of the tyres are significantly under-inflated. This message may be displayed aftera new sensor has been installed. Check thetyres and inflate them to the recommendedpressure. See Technical specifications

(page 235).

redCheck tyre pres-sures

The tyre indicated is significantly under-inflated.Check the tyre and inflate it to the recom-

mendedpressure. SeeTechnicalspecifica-tions (page 235).

amberCheck ..... tyre

You have installed a temporary spare wheel.Install a correctly inflated full size wheel with asensor as soon as possible.When amalfunctionoccurs, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tyre pressure.

amberTyre monitormalfunction

104

Information displays

Page 107: Mondeo MK3 Book

ActionIndicatorMessage

Up to three sensors have malfunctioned, anunapproved accessory is interfering with thesystem or a general malfunction has beendetected. Have the system checked by a

properly trained technician as soon as possible.When a malfunction occurs, the system maynot be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure.

The tyre pressures are not suitable for drivingat 160 km/h (100 mph). Inflate the tyres to therecommended pressure. See Technical

specifications (page 235). Thismessagewillbe displayed for only a few seconds with a low

tyre pressure warning.

amberInflate tyres for highspeed

You have installed wheels and tyres that do nothave sensors. The tyre pressures will not be

monitored.

-Tyre sensors notdetected

All sensors have malfunctioned or an unap-proved accessory is interferingwith the system.Have the system checked by a properly trained

technician as soon as possible.

Voice control

ActionIndicatorMessage

See Voice control (page 252).-Voice controlPlease speak

See Voice control (page 252).-Voice control Notrecognised

See Voice control (page 252).-Voice control Notallowed

105

Information displays

Page 108: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

Outside air

Keep the air intakes forward of thewindscreen free from obstruction (snow,leaves etc.) to allow the climate controlsystem to function effectively.

Recirculated air

CAUTION

Prolonged use of recirculated airmaycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings

for defrosting and demisting thewindscreen.

The air currently in the passengercompartmentwill be recirculated. Outsideair will not enter the vehicle.

Heating

Heating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.

Air conditioning

Note: The air conditioning operates onlywhen the temperature is above 4ºC(39ºF).

Note: If you use the air conditioning, thefuel consumption of your vehicle will behigher.

Air is directed through the evaporatorwhere it is cooled. Humidity is extractedfrom the air to help keep thewindows freeof mist. The resulting condensation isdirected to the outside of the vehicle andit is therefore normal if you see a smallpool of water under your vehicle.

General information oncontrolling the interior climate

Fully close all the windows.

Warming the interior

Direct the air towards your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct someof the air towards thewindscreen and thedoor windows.

Cooling the interior

Direct the air towards your face.

AIR VENTS

Front air vents

E71942

Rear air vents

BA

E89129

OpenA

CloseB

106

Climate control

Page 109: Mondeo MK3 Book

MANUALCLIMATECONTROL

Air distribution control

A

F B

C

D

E

E71379

WindscreenA

Footwell and windscreenB

FootwellC

Face level and footwellD

Face levelE

Face level and windscreenF

You can set the air distribution control toany position between the symbols.

Blower

E75470

A

OffA

Note: If you switch the blower off, thewindscreen may mist up.

Recirculated air

Press the button to toggle betweenoutside air and recirculated air.

Heating the interior quickly

E71377

107

Climate control

Page 110: Mondeo MK3 Book

Ventilation

E71378

Set the air distribution control, blower andair vents to suit your requirements.

Air conditioning

Switching the air conditioning onand off

If you turn the blower off, the airconditioning will turn off. When you turnthe blower on again, the air conditioningwill come on automatically.

Coolingwith outside air

E71380

Cooling the interior quickly

E71381

Defrosting and demisting thewindscreen

E71382

When the temperature is above 4°C(39°F), the air conditioning will switch onautomatically. Make sure that the bloweris on. The indicator in the switch willilluminate during defrosting anddemisting.

If you move the air distribution control toa position other than A, the A/C willremain on.

You can switch the air conditioning andrecirculated air on and off while the airdistribution control is set to position A.

If necessary, switch the heated windowson. See Heatedwindows andmirrors (page 112).

108

Climate control

Page 111: Mondeo MK3 Book

Reducing interior air humidity

E71383

AUTOMATICCLIMATECONTROL

E91390

The system controls the temperature,amount and distribution of the air flowautomatically and adjusts themaccordingto the driving and weather conditions.Pressing theAUTObuttononce switcheson the auto mode.

The system in your vehicle is dual-zoneautomatic climate control. When thesystem is in mono mode, all thetemperature zones are linked to thedriver's zone. When you switch monomode off, the dual-zone system allowsyou to set different temperatures for thedriver's and front passenger's side.

Note: Avoid adjusting the settings whenthe vehicle interior is extremely hot orcold. The automatic climate controladjusts to the current circumstancesautomatically. For the system to functionproperly, the side and centre vents shouldbe fully open.

Note: The sunload sensor is located ontop of the instrument panel. Do not coverthe sensor with any objects.

Note:At lowoutside temperatures,whenthe system is in automode, the air streamwill be directed to thewindscreen and theside windows as long as the engine iscold.

109

Climate control

Page 112: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: For information on the automaticclimate control, on vehicles fitted with acombined Navigation and automaticclimate control system, see separatehandbook.

Setting the temperature

E91391

You can set the temperature between15.5ºC (60°F) and 29.5ºC (85°F) in stepsof 0.5ºC (33°F). In position LO, 15ºC(59°F), the system will switch topermanent cooling. In position HI, 30°C(86°F), the system will switch topermanent heating.

Note: If either position LO or HI isselected, the system will not regulate astable temperature.

Monomode

In monomode, the temperature settingsfor both the driver’s and passenger’s sideare linked. If you adjust the temperatureusing the rotary control on the driver’sside, the settings will be adjusted to thesame setting on the passenger’s side. Inmono mode, MONO appears in thedisplay.

To switchmonomodeoff

Select a temperature for the passenger’sside with the rotary control on thepassenger’s side. Monomodewill switchoff andMONO disappears from thedisplay. The temperature for the driver’ssidewill remain unchanged. You can nowadjust the driver and passenger sidetemperatures independently of eachanother. The temperature settings foreach side are shown in the display. Youcan set a temperature difference of up to4ºC (39°F).

Note: If you set a temperature differenceof greater than 4ºC (39°F), thetemperature on the other side will beadjusted so that the difference remains4ºC (39°F).

Note: If you set one of the sides toHI orLO, both sides will be set to HI or LO.

To switchmonomodeback on

To switchmonomodeback on, press theMONO button.MONO reappears in thedisplay and the passenger’s sidetemperature will be adjusted to thedriver’s side temperature.

Blower

Use the buttons to adjust the blowerspeed.

The blower setting is indicated in thedisplay.

To return to automode, press theAUTObutton.

110

Climate control

Page 113: Mondeo MK3 Book

Air distribution

To adjust air distribution, press the desiredbutton. Any combination of settings canbe selected simultaneously.

E70308

A B C

FootwellA

Face levelB

WindscreenC

When you select windscreen defrostingand demisting, A, B and C switch offautomatically and the air conditioningswitches on. Outside air will flow into thevehicle. You cannot select recirculatedair.

Windscreen defrosting anddemisting

E91392

Press the windscreen defrosting anddemisting button. Outside air will flow intothe vehicle. Air conditioning isautomatically selected. As long as the airdistribution is set to this position, youcannot select recirculated air.

The blower speed and the temperaturecontrol operate automatically and cannotbe adjusted manually. The blower is setto high speed and the temperature toHI.

When you select windscreen defrostinganddemisting, the heated screens switchon automatically and switch off after ashort time.

To return to automode, press theAUTObutton.

Switching the air conditioningon and off

E91393

Press the A/C button to switch the airconditioningonandoff.A/COFF appearsin the display when the air conditioning isswitched off.

A/CON appears in the display when theair conditioning is switched on.

Recirculated air

Press the recirculated air button to togglebetween outside air and recirculated air.

Note:When the system is in auto modeand the interior and exterior temperaturesare quite hot, the system selectsrecirculated air automatically tomaximisecooling of the interior. Once the selectedtemperature is reached, the system willreselect outside air automatically.

Switching off the automaticclimate control

E91394

Press theOFF button.

When switchedoff, the heating, ventilationand air conditioning system is switchedoff and recirculated air is selected.

111

Climate control

Page 114: Mondeo MK3 Book

HEATEDWINDOWSANDMIRRORS

Heatedwindows

Use the heated windows to defrost ordemist the windscreen or rear window.

Note: The heatedwindowsoperate onlywhen the engine is running.

Heatedwindscreen

E72506

Heated rearwindow

E72507

Heated exteriormirrors

Electric exterior mirrors are fitted with aheating element thatwill defrost or demistthe mirror glass. They will switch onautomaticallywhen you switch the heatedrear window on.

AUXILIARYHEATER

Parking heater

WARNING

The parking heater must not beoperated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or

dust or in enclosed spaces.

The parking heater operatesindependently of the vehicle heater byheating the engine’s coolant circuit. It isfed from the vehicle fuel tank. You canalso use it while the vehicle is in motion tohelp the vehicle heater warm up theinterior more quickly.

Used properly, the parking heaterprovides the following benefits:

• It preheats the interior of the vehicle.

• It keeps the windows clear of ice inthe event of frost and preventscondensation.

• It avoids cold starts and allows theengine to reach operatingtemperature sooner.

Note: The parking heater will onlyoperate if there is at least 7.5 litres (1.6gallons) of fuel in the fuel tank and theambient temperature is below 15°C(59°F). The heater will not operate if thebattery is low.

Note: The heating depends on theoutside air temperature.

Note:When the parking heater isactivated, exhaust fumesmay come fromunder the sides of the vehicle. This isnormal.

Note:On vehicleswith amanual heating,ventilation and air conditioning system,the heating of the vehicle interior isdependent on the temperature, airdistribution and blower control settings.

To prevent the battery from discharging:

• Once the parking heater hasperformedone heating cycle, the nextprogrammed heating cycle will onlybe carried out if you have started thevehicle’s engine in between.

• After a heating cycle, drive the vehiclefor at least the period of the heatingcycle.

Programming the parking heater

Note: The programmed time is the timeat which you wish the vehicle to be warmand ready to drive, not the time at whichthe heater switches on.

112

Climate control

Page 115: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: You must programme the timesat least 70minutes in advance of the timeyou wish to set.

Note: You must set the time and datecorrectly. See Clock (page 126).To programme the heating times:

E70499

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightParkHeater and press theright arrow button.

E74467

One-Time

Program 1Program 2

Active now

Park Heater

• The functions Program 1 andProgram2 allow you to programmeup to two heating cycles for each dayof the week. These times will remainstored and the heaterwill warmup thevehicle at these times on these daysevery week.

• The functionOne-Time allows youto programme one heating cycle forone specific day.

• The function Active nowautomatically switches on the heater.

Programming the functionsProgram 1 andProgram2

E74468

FridayThursday

TuesdayMonday

Wednesday

[07:55]

Program 1

1. Highlight Program 1 and press theright arrow button.

2. Highlight the day on which the heatershould warm up the vehicle.

3. Press theOK button to confirm theselection. A cross appears in the boxnext to the day to show that this dayis selected.

4. Continue in the sameway to select allthe days on which the heater shouldwarm up the vehicle.

113

Climate control

Page 116: Mondeo MK3 Book

5. To set the time at which the vehicleshould be warmed up, highlight thetime at the top of the display andpress the right arrow button.

6. Press theOK button and the hoursflash. Use the up and down arrowbuttons to adjust the individual settingsand the left and right arrow buttons tomove to the next or previous setting.

7. When you have finished, press theOKbutton again to confirm the selection.

E74469

07:5501:12:2006

ParkheaterProgram 1

OK = change

You can use the function Program2 toset a second cycle, for example differenttimes on different days or twice on thesame day. The programming procedureis the same as for the functionProgram1.

Programming the functionOne-Time

1. HighlightOne-Time and press theright arrow button.

2. Press theOK button and the hoursflash. Use the up and down arrowbuttons to adjust the individual settingsand the left and right arrow buttons tomove to the next or previous setting.

3. When you have finished, press theOKbutton again to confirm the selection.

Active now

HighlightActivenow and press theOKbutton. A cross appears in the box nextto the function to show that the heater isactivated.

To deactivate the heater, highlightActivenow and press theOK button again.

Remote starting

The parking heater may be started andswitched off from a distance of up to 500metres (1640 feet) using the suppliedremote control transmitter. This rangewillvary depending upon local conditions andterrain, as well as battery condition. Theremote control transmitter will indicatewhether or not the signal has beenreceived. The parking heater will operatefor a maximum of 30 minutes.

Note: The heaterwill operate, dependingon the ambient temperature, for between10 and 30 minutes. The interior will cooldown after the heating period haselapsed, therefore a remote start morethan 30 minutes before driving is notrecommended.

Note: The remote control may notalways receive confirmation of asuccessful remotecommandat extendedoperating ranges.

Starting

Hold the transmitter with the antennaupwards and press the ON button for atleast two seconds. The LED on thetransmitter lights up green to confirm thesignal has been received.

Switching off

Hold the transmitter with the antennaupwards and press the OFF button for atleast two seconds. The LED on thetransmitter lights up red to confirm thesignal has been received.

114

Climate control

Page 117: Mondeo MK3 Book

Remote start in combinationwith direct start or timer

E114360

Remote start is integrated with normalheater control. Parking heaters startedwith direct start or timer functions can beswitched off with the remote controltransmitter and vice versa.

Feedback during starting andswitching off

The LED on the transmitter illuminatesgreen for about two seconds. Thisindicates the signal has been received bythe vehicle and the heater has started.

The LEDon the transmitter illuminates redfor about two seconds. This indicates thesignal has been received by the vehicleand the heater has switched off.

The LED on the transmitter flashes greenor red for about two seconds. Thisindicates the signal was not transmittedcorrectly. Repeat the transmission.

The LED on the transmitter illuminatesorange for about two seconds beforeshowing green or red. This indicates thetransmitter batteries areweak and shouldbe changed.

The LEDon the transmitter flashes orangefor about 5 seconds. This indicates thatthe signal was not transmitted. Thetransmitter batteries are discharged andshould be changed as soon as possible.

Changing the remote controlbattery

Make sure that you dispose of oldbatteries in an environmentally friendlyway. Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.

E114361

2

1

1. Insert a screwdriver or other suitabletool into the slot on the back of theremote control, and unscrew thecompartment cover.

CAUTION

Do not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.

2. Carefully prise out the battery.

3. Install a new battery (3.3V typeCR1-3N) with the + facing upwards.

4. Re-assemble the remote control.

Programming the transmitter

Further transmittersmay be usedwith theremote system, please consult yourdealer. Up to a maximum of 3 separateremote controls may be added. Whenadding extra transmitters these must beprogrammed separately.

Note: The heater must be switched offduring programming.

115

Climate control

Page 118: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note:Theprogrammingproceduremaybe repeated as often as is required. Theoldest programmed transmitter will bedeleted each time.

1. Install the battery in the newtransmitter.

2. Turn off the power to the receiver byremoving fuse F32 from the enginecompartment fuse box. See Fusespecification chart (page 193).

3. Wait for at least 5 seconds.

4. Reconnect power to the receiver byreplacing the fuse, and press the OFFbutton on the new transmitter within5 seconds until the LED light turns off.

5. The new transmitter is nowprogrammed.

Fuel operated heater(depending on country)

WARNING

The fuel operated heater must notbe operated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or

dust or in enclosed spaces.

The fuel operated heater aids in warmingthe engine and the vehicle interior onvehicleswith a diesel engine. It is switchedon or off automatically depending on theoutside air temperature and the coolanttemperature, unless youhavedeactivatedit. When the fuel operated heater isoperating, Aux. Heater on is displayedin the information display. SeeInformation displays (page 84).

To deactivate the fuel operated heater:

E70499

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. HighlightAux.Heater and press theOKbutton to toggle the heater on andoff. A cross appears in the box whenthe heater is activated.

4. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.

Diesel auxiliary heater(depending on country)

The diesel auxiliary heater (PTC electricalheater) aids inwarming the vehicle interioron vehicles with a diesel engine. It isswitched on or off automaticallydependingon theoutside air temperature,the coolant temperature and thealternator load.

116

Climate control

Page 119: Mondeo MK3 Book

ELECTRICSUNROOF

E78054

WARNING

Before operating the electricsunroof you should verify it is free ofobstructions and ensure that

children and/or pets are not in theproximity of the sunroof opening. Failureto do so could result in serious personalinjury. It is the primary responsibility of thesupervising adults to never leave a childunattended in a vehicle and to never leavethe keys in an unattended vehicle.

Note:When the switches are operatedoften during a short period of time, thesystem might become inoperable for acertain time to prevent damage due tooverheating.

Note: The electric sunroof can also beoperatedwith the ignition off via the globalopening and global closing function. SeeGlobal opening and closing (page39).

There are two ways of opening thesunroof – the rear of the sunroof lifts openor the sunroof opens from the front,sliding back under the roof. The sunroofopens and closes whilst the switch ispressed.

Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric sunroof.

The power sunroof is operated by aswitch located between the sun visors.

Opening and closing thesunroof

E72188

E72185

B

A

Press to closeA

Press to openB

117

Climate control

Page 120: Mondeo MK3 Book

Tilting the sunroof

E72189

E72185

B

A

Press to openA

Press to closeB

Opening and closing thesunroof automatically

Note:When opening automatically, thesunroofwill stop about 8 cm from the fullyopened position. This position reducesthe buffeting noise which is sometimesheard when the sunroof is fully open. Thesunroof will only stop automatically in thisposition when the sunroof is openedautomatically.

To open or close the sunroofautomatically press either side of theswitch to the second action point andrelease it completely. Press again to stop.

When the closed position is reached, thesunroof stops automatically.

Sunroof anti-trap protection

WARNINGSThe anti-trap function is deactivateduntil the memory has been reset.Careless closing of the window can

cause injuries.

Careless closing of the electricsunroof can override the anti-trapprotection and cause injuries.

The sunroof will stop automatically whileclosing and reverse somedistance if thereis an obstacle in the way.

To override anti-trap protection whenthere is a resistance, e. g. in the winter,proceed as follows:

WARNING

While the sunroof is being closed forthe third time, the anti-trap functionis disabled. Make sure there are no

obstacles in the way of the closingsunroof.

Close the sunroof a third time to theresistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and the sunroof cannot beclosed automatically. The sunroof willoverride the resistance and can then beclosed fully.

If the sunroof does not close after thethird attempt, have it checked by anexpert.

118

Climate control

Page 121: Mondeo MK3 Book

Sunroof safetymode

WARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make surethat there are no obstacles in the

way of the closing sunroof.

If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The sunroof willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop again. Close the sunroofby pressing the button again when thesunroof stops moving. When the rear ofthe sunroof is lifted, lift the rear all the wayand then close the sunroof. Have thesystem checked by an expertimmediately.

Sunroof relearning

WARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make surethat there are no obstacles in the

way of the closing sunroof.

In case the sunroof no longer closesproperly, follow this relearning procedure:

• Tilt the rear of the sunroof as far aspossible. Release the button.

• Press and hold the samebutton againfor 30 seconds until you see thesunroof move.

• Release the button and immediatelypress and hold it again. The sunroofwill close, open fully and then closeagain. Do not release the buttonbefore the sunroof has reached theclosed position for the second time.

If the button is not pressed continuously,the relearning functionwill be interrupted.Start the procedure once more from thebeginning.

119

Climate control

Page 122: Mondeo MK3 Book

SITTING IN THECORRECTPOSITION

E68595

WARNINGSDo not adjust the seats when thevehicle is moving.

Only when you use the seat beltproperly, can it hold you in a positionthat allows the airbag to achieve its

optimum effect.

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, seat belt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a collision. We recommend that you:

• sit in an upright position with the baseof your spine as far back as possible.

• do not recline the seatbackmore than30 degrees.

• adjust the head restraint so that thetop of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forwards as possible,remaining comfortable.

• keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 250millimetres (10 inches) between yourbreastbone and the airbag cover.

• hold the steeringwheelwith your armsslightly bent.

• bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the centre of your shoulderand position the lap strap tightlyacross your hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you canmaintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

MANUALSEATS

Moving the seats backwardsand forwards

E70728

WARNING

Rock the seat backwards andforwards after releasing the lever tomake sure that it is fully engaged in

its catch.

120

Seats

Page 123: Mondeo MK3 Book

Adjusting the lumbar support

E70729

Adjusting the height of thedriver’s seat

E70730

Adjusting the angle of theseatback

E70731

ELECTRICSEATS

2-way electric seat

E70733

1

1

2

2

121

Seats

Page 124: Mondeo MK3 Book

8-way electric seat

12 2 1 3

4

3

4

8 7

8 7

5

6

5

6E70734

122

Seats

Page 125: Mondeo MK3 Book

HEADRESTRAINTS

Adjusting the head restraint

WARNINGSRaise the rear head restraint whenthe rear seat is occupied by apassenger.

When using a forward facing childrestraint on a rear seat, alwaysremove the head restraint from that

seat.

E71879

Adjust the head restraint so that the topof it is level with the top of your head andas far forwards as possible, remainingcomfortable.

Removing the head restraint

Press the locking buttons and remove thehead restraint.

REARSEATS

WARNINGSWhen folding the seatbacks down,take care not to get your fingerscaught between the seatback and

seat frame.

Make sure that the seats and theseatbacks are secure and fullyengaged in their catches.

Folding the seatbacks down

CAUTION

Lower the head restraints.

1

2

1

E86611

1. Press the unlock buttons down andhold them there.

2. Push the seatback forwards.

Creating a level load floor

WARNING

Make sure the red indicator is notshowingwhen you engage the seatin the catches.

123

Seats

Page 126: Mondeo MK3 Book

CAUTION

Lower the head restraints.

2

13

2

E86612

1. Insert your fingers between the seatcushion and seatback and fold theseat cushion forwards.

2. Press the unlock buttons down andhold them there.

3. Push the seatback forwards.

Folding the seatbacks up

WARNING

When folding the seatbacks up,make sure that the belts are visibleto an occupant and not caught

behind the seat.

HEATEDSEATS

CAUTION

Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

E70601

E71224

Note: The number of illuminated lightsbeside the button indicates the selectedstep.

Note: The heater setting is indicated inred.

Note:When no light is illuminated, theheating is switched off.

Note: Only the front seat settings arestored when you switch off the ignition.

Raising and lowering thetemperature automatically

Press and hold the relevant button.

124

Seats

Page 127: Mondeo MK3 Book

Raising and lowering thetemperaturemanually

Press the relevant button repeatedly.

VENTILATEDSEATS

CAUTION

Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

E70601

E70602

Note: The number of illuminated lightsbeside the button indicates the selectedstep.

Note: The ventilation setting is indicatedin blue.

Note:When no light is illuminated, theventilation is switched off.

Note: The settings are stored when theignition is switched off.

Note:When the seat is being ventilated,the heater may switch on automatically.This is to prevent the flow of air becominguncomfortably cool.

Note: The air in the vehicle interior is usedto ventilate the seats. The cooling effecttherefore depends on the temperatureof the vehicle interior. Switch on the airconditioning if necessary and set the airdistribution to footwell. See Climatecontrol (page 106).

Raising and lowering thetemperature automatically

Press and hold the relevant button.

Raising and lowering thetemperaturemanually

Press the relevant button repeatedly.

125

Seats

Page 128: Mondeo MK3 Book

SUNBLINDS

Pull the blind up and attach it to the hooks(A).

Sidewindows

E74809

AA

Rearwindow

AA

E86514

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER

E70723

CLOCK

Note: Some navigation systems willautomatically set the date and time on theclock using GPS signals.

Note: SeeGeneral information (page84).

1. From themainmenu, select the clockfunction.

2. Select the option required.

3. PressOK.4. Using the right, left, up and down

arrow buttons, select and change thevalue.

5. PressOK.

CIGAR LIGHTER

CAUTIONSIf you use the socket when theengine is not running, the batterymay discharge.

Do not hold the cigar lighter elementpressed in.

126

Convenience features

Page 129: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: Switch the ignition on to use thecigar lighter. You can also use it for up to30 minutes after you have switched theignition off.

Note: You can use the socket to power12 volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 15 Amperes. Use onlyFord accessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standardsockets.

E72972

Press the element in to use the cigarlighter. It will pop out automatically.

ASHTRAY

Front ashtray

E72974

To empty, pull out the complete ashtray.

Rear ashtray

E73705

To remove the ashtray, open it, press itdown against the spring and remove it.

AUXILIARYPOWERSOCKETS

CAUTION

If you use the socket when theengine is not running, the batterymay discharge.

Note: You can use the socket when theignition is switched off.

Note: You can use the socket to power12 volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 15 Amperes. Use onlyFord accessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standardsockets.

127

Convenience features

Page 130: Mondeo MK3 Book

E86470

CUPHOLDERS

WARNING

Do not place hot drinks in the cupholders when the vehicle is moving.

GLOVEBOX

Cooled glove box

Note: You can cool the glove box usingair from the air conditioning system.

E70885

STORAGECOMPARTMENTS

WARNING

Do not drive with any storagecompartment lid open. Make surethat you secure the lid before

setting off.

CAUTION

Donot keepheat-sensitive items andliquids in any storage compartment.

E73704 E72905

E72905

128

Convenience features

Page 131: Mondeo MK3 Book

MAPPOCKETS

E74686

MEMORYFUNCTION

WARNINGSBefore activating the seat memory,make sure that the area immediatelysurrounding the seat is clear of

obstructions and that all occupants areclear of moving parts.

Do not use the memory storefunctionwhen the vehicle ismoving.

A

B

E86768

Seat adjustment controls SeeElectric seats (page 121).

A

Memory pre-set buttonsB

Up to four different driver's seat andexterior mirror positions can be stored inthe memory. Your preferred setting forthe reversemirror dipping feature can alsobe stored. See Electric exteriormirrors (page 73).

Setting amemory pre-set

Passive setting

The vehicle stores the seating and mirrorpositions for up to four remote controlsor passive keys. Next time the vehicle isunlocked, the position of the seat andmirrorswill adjust to the last used position.

Each time you turn the ignition off, thecurrent seat andmirror settings are storedon the remote control or passive keyused.

Active setting

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Adjust the seat and exteriormirrors tothe desired position.

129

Convenience features

Page 132: Mondeo MK3 Book

3. Press and hold the desired pre-setbutton B until a single chime soundsto confirm.

Recallingastoredseatposition

Note: To stop seat movement during arecall, press any driver seat adjustmentcontrol, any of thememory buttons or anymirror control switch. Seatmovementwillalso stop if you move the vehicle.

Passive recall

Note: If more than one passive key is inrange, the memory function will move tothe settings of the first key stored.

When you unlock the vehicle with theremote control or pull the driver doorhandle with a passive key in range, theseat and mirrors will move to the positionstored on that remote control or passivekey.

Active recall

Press the pre-set button associated withthe desired driving position. The seat andmirrors will move to the position storedon that pre-set.

Resetting thememory

If any seat position travel is interrupted(e.g. an obstacle in the way or loss ofpower supply), you will need to reset thememory.

Note:Make sure all electrical accessoriesare switched off.

1. Turn the ignition to position II.2. Operate the seat adjustment control

to move the seat in the requireddirection until it stops. See Electricseats (page 121). A clickwill be heard.

3. Release the seat adjustment controland immediately press and hold theswitch in the same direction for atleast 3 seconds. Keep it held until theseat stops at the mechanical end ofits travel and a click is heard.

4. Release the seat adjustment control.

5. Operate the same seat adjustmentcontrol in the opposite direction for atleast 3 seconds. Keep it held until theseat stops at the mechanical end ofits travel and a click is heard.

GLASSESHOLDER

E131605

CDCHANGER

This is located in the luggagecompartment.

130

Convenience features

Page 133: Mondeo MK3 Book

AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX IN)SOCKET

E71969

See separate audio handbook.

USBPORT

E104423

See Connectivity (page 270).

FLOORMATS

WARNING

When using the floor mats, alwaysmake sure the floor mat is properlysecured using the appropriate

fixings and positioned so that it does notinterfere with the operation of the pedals.

131

Convenience features

Page 134: Mondeo MK3 Book

GENERAL INFORMATION

General points on starting

If the battery has been disconnected thevehicle may exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approx. 8 kilometres(5 miles) after reconnecting the battery.

This is because the engine managementsystemmust realign itself with the engine.Any unusual driving characteristics duringthis period may be disregarded.

Starting the engine by towingor pushing

WARNING

To prevent damage you must notpush or tow start your vehicle. Usebooster cables and a booster

battery. See Using booster cables(page 223).

IGNITIONSWITCH

WARNING

Never return the key to position 0or I when the vehicle is in motion.

E72128

0 The ignition is off.

I The ignition and all main electrical circuitsare disabled.

Note:Do not leave the ignition key in thisposition for too long to avoid dischargingthe battery.

II The ignition is switched on. All electricalcircuits are operational. Warning lampsand indicators illuminate. This is the keyposition when driving. You must alsoselect it when being towed.

III The starter motor is activated. Releasethe key as soon as the engine starts.

KEYLESSSTARTING

WARNINGSThe keyless starting systemmaynotfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such

as mobile phones.

Always check that the steeringwheel lock is deactivated beforeattempting to move your vehicle.

See Steeringwheel lock (page 134).

Note: A valid passive key must belocated inside the vehicle to switch theignition on and start the engine.

Note: To start your engine youmust alsofully depress the brake or clutch pedal,depending on the transmission fitted.

E85766

Ignition on

Press the start button once. All electricalcircuits are operational, warning lampsand indicators illuminate.

132

Starting the engine

Page 135: Mondeo MK3 Book

Startingwith automatictransmission

Note: Releasing the brake pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.

1. Make sure the transmission is in P orN.

2. Fully depress the brake pedal.

3. Press the start button.

Startingwithmanualtransmission

Note: Releasing the clutch pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.

2. Press the start button.

Starting a diesel engine

Note: Engine cranking may notcommence until the engine glow plugcycle has been completed. Thismay takeseveral seconds in extremely coldconditions.

Note: Continue to press the clutch orbrake pedal until engine cranking begins.

Failure to start

The passive starting system will notfunction if:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.

If you are unable to start your vehicle carryout the following procedure.

Type 1

E87382

1. Hold the key next to the steeringcolumn shroud exactly as shown.

2. With the key in this position you canuse the start button to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.

Type2

E87381

1. Carefully prise out the cover.

133

Starting the engine

Page 136: Mondeo MK3 Book

E85767

2. Insert the key into the key holder.

3. With the key in this position you canuse the start button to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.

Stopping the enginewith thevehicle stationary

Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators will beswitched off.

Manual transmission

Press the start button.

Automatic transmission

1. Move the selector lever to positionP.2. Press the start button.

Stopping the enginewhen thevehicle ismoving

WARNING

Switching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering

assistance. The steering will not belocked, but higher effort will be required.When the ignition is switched off someelectrical circuits, warning lamps andindicators may also be OFF.

Press and hold the start button for twoseconds, or press three timeswithin threeseconds.

STEERINGWHEEL LOCK

WARNING

Always check that the steering isunlocked before attempting tomove your vehicle.

Vehicleswithout keylessstarting

To activate the steering wheel lock;

1. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

2. Turn the steering wheel.

Vehicleswith keyless starting

Note: The steering wheel lock will notactivate when the ignition is on or thevehicle is moving.

Your vehicle has an electronicallycontrolled steering wheel lock. Thisoperates automatically.

The steering wheel lock will activate aftera short period of time once you haveparked your vehicle and the passive keyis outside of the vehicle.

Deactivating the steeringwheellock

Switch the ignition on, or:

Vehicles with automatic transmission• Press the brake pedal.

Vehicles with manual transmission• Press the clutch pedal.

134

Starting the engine

Page 137: Mondeo MK3 Book

STARTINGAPETROLENGINE

Note: You can only operate the starterfor a maximum of 30 seconds at a time.

Cold or hot engine

All vehicles

CAUTION

When the temperature is below-20ºC (-4ºF), switch the ignition onfor at least one second before

starting the engine. This will make surethat the maximum fuel pressure isestablished for starting the engine.

Vehicleswithmanual transmission

Note: Do not touch the acceleratorpedal.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.

2. Start the engine.

Vehicleswith automatictransmission

Note: Do not touch the acceleratorpedal.

1. Select park or neutral.

2. Fully depress the brake pedal.

3. Start the engine.

All vehicles

If the engine does not start within 15seconds, wait for a short period and tryagain.

If the engine does not start after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow theFlooded engine procedure.

If you have difficulty starting the enginewhen the temperature is below -25ºC(-13ºF), press the accelerator pedalbetween¼ to½of its travel and try again.

Flooded engine

Vehicleswithmanual transmission

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedaland hold it there.

3. Start the engine.

Vehicleswith automatictransmission

1. Select park or neutral.

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedaland hold it there.

3. Fully depress the brake pedal.

4. Start the engine.

All vehicles

If the engine does not start, repeat theCold or hot engine procedure.

Engineidlespeedafterstarting

The speed at which the engine idlesimmediately after starting will varydepending on the engine temperature.

If the engine is cold then the idle speedwill automatically be increased in order toheat the catalytic converter as quickly aspossible. This ensures that vehicleemissions are kept to an absoluteminimum.

The idle speedwill slowly decrease to thenormal level as the catalytic converterwarms up.

STARTINGAPETROLENGINE - E85

For general information on starting apetrol engine. See Starting a petrolengine (page 135).

135

Starting the engine

Page 138: Mondeo MK3 Book

Starting at lowambienttemperatures

When the temperature is lower than -10°C(14°F) and the vehicle is filled with E85, anengine block heater should be used tofacilitate starting. See Engine heater(page 137). Failure to do this will result in anon start.

If the temperature is expected to remainbelow -10°C (14°F), it is recommendedthat you increase the proportion of petrolin the tank by topping up with 95 octaneunleaded petrol if the tank is not alreadyfull. About 10 litres (2.2 gallons) of petrolwill reduce the proportion of E85 in a ¾full tank from 85% to 70% and willconsiderably improve cold start capability.

If, at very low temperatures, the tank isfilled with only E85 and there is no way touse an engine block heater, you mayexperience difficulties starting the engine.

If the engine fails to start, proceed asfollows:

1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.

2. Turn the ignition key to position III.

CAUTION

Release the ignition key as soon asthe engine has started.

3. Gradually release the acceleratorpedal after 5 seconds of enginecranking or as the engine speed rises.

If the engine fails to start, repeat steps 1,2 and 3, or connect an engine blockheater for two hours before attemptinganother start.

During starting, the fuel injectors areturnedoff as long as the accelerator pedalis depressed. This can be used to drainexcessive fuel from the intake manifoldafter several unsuccessful startingattempts.

If the battery has been disconnected orafter the fuel type has been changed, theidle speed may be irregular. This willimprove after 10 to 30 seconds.

STARTINGADIESELENGINE

Cold or hot engine

All vehicles

Note:When the temperature is below-15ºC (5ºF), you may need to crank theengine for up to 25 seconds. If youconsistently operate the vehicle in suchtemperatures, we recommend that youhave an engine block heater fitted.

Note:Continue cranking the engine untilit starts.

Note: You can only operate the starterfor a maximum of 30 seconds at a time.

Switch the ignition on and waituntil the glow plug indicatorgoes off.

Vehicleswithmanual transmission

Note: Do not touch the acceleratorpedal.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.

2. Start the engine.

Vehicleswith automatictransmission

1. Select park or neutral.

2. Fully depress the brake pedal.

3. Start the engine.

136

Starting the engine

Page 139: Mondeo MK3 Book

DIESELPARTICULATEFILTER (DPF)

The DPF forms part of the emissionsreduction systems fitted to your vehicle.It filters harmful diesel particulates (soot)from the exhaust gas.

Regeneration

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF

regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and theexhaust will radiate a considerableamount of heat during and after DPFregeneration, andafter youhave switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.

CAUTION

Avoid running out of fuel.

Note: After you have switched yourengine off the fans may continue to runfor a short period of time.

Unlike a normal filter which requiresperiodic replacement, the DPF has beendesigned to regenerate, or clean itself tomaintain operating efficiency. Theregeneration process takes placeautomatically. However, some drivingconditions mean that you may need tosupport the regeneration process.

If you drive only short distances or yourjourneys contain frequent stopping andstarting, where there is increasedacceleration and deceleration, occasionaltrips with the following conditions couldassist the regeneration process:

• Drive your vehicle at a constant speed,preferably on a main road ormotorway, for up to 20 minutes.

• Avoid prolonged idling and alwaysobserve speed limits and roadconditions.

• Do not switch off the ignition.

• Use a lower gear than normal tomaintain a higher engine speedduringthis journey, where appropriate.

SWITCHINGOFF THEENGINE

Vehicleswith a turbocharger

CAUTION

Do not switch the engine off when itis running at high speed. If you do,the turbocharger will continue

running after the engine oil pressure hasdropped to zero. This will lead topremature turbocharger bearing wear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed andthen switch it off.

ENGINEHEATER

CAUTION

Make sure youdisconnect thepowercable from the engine heaterconnector before driving away.

Note: The engine heater connector islocated in the radiator grille at the front ofyour vehicle.

137

Starting the engine

Page 140: Mondeo MK3 Book

E97918

Connect the engine heater for 2 to 3hours before starting the engine.

138

Starting the engine

Page 141: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

The system assists the driver to drivemore efficiently by constantly monitoringcharacteristics of gear changing,anticipation of traffic conditions andspeeds on motorways and open roads.

Note: These efficiency values do notresult in a defined fuel consumption figure.It might vary as it is not only related tothese driving disciplines but alsoinfluenced bymany other factors such asshort journeys and cold starts.

Note: Frequent short journeys, wherethe engine does not fully warm up, willalso increase fuel consumption.

The value of these characteristics isrepresented by petals shown in thedisplay, with five petals being the mostefficient. The more efficiently you drive,the better the rating, and the better youroverall fuel consumption.

Type 1

E121813A B C

Gear shiftingA

AnticipationB

Efficient speedC

Gear shifting

Using the highest drivable gearappropriate for the road conditions willimprove fuel consumption.

Anticipation

Adjusting your vehicle speed and thedistance to other vehicles without theneed for heavy braking or accelerationwill improve fuel consumption.

Efficient speed

Higher speeds use more fuel. Reducingyour cruising speed on open roads willimprove fuel consumption.

Type2 and3

The relevant information will be shown inthe display.

USINGECOMODE

The system is accessedusing the relevantinformation display menu. SeeInformation displays (page 84).

Resetting Ecomode

Reset the average fuel consumption.

Note: New values may take a short timeto calculate.

139

Ecomode

Page 142: Mondeo MK3 Book

FUELQUALITY - PETROL

CAUTION

Do not use leaded petrol or petrolwith additives containing othermetallic compounds (e.g.

manganese-based). They could damagethe emission system.

Note:We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.

Useminimum95octane unleadedpetrol thatmeets the specification definedby EN228, or equivalent.

FUELQUALITY - E85

WARNINGSDo not modify the fuel systemconfiguration or the components inthe system.

Do not replace the fuel system orthe components with parts notspecially designed to be used with

E85.

CAUTIONSDo not use leaded petrol or petrolwith additives containing othermetallic compounds (e.g.

manganese-based). They could damagethe emission system.

Do not usemethanol instead of E85.

Note:We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.

Note:When using E85, you mayexperience a higher fuel consumption.

Note: Your vehicle will operate well oncommercial quality 95 octane unleadedpetrol, but only high quality E85 offers thesame protection and performance.

Useminimum95octane unleadedpetrol thatmeets the specification definedby EN228, or equivalent. You can alsouse amixture of unleaded petrol and E85.

Long-termstorage

Due to small amounts of corrosiveimpurities that may be found in the E85,it is recommended that you fill the tankwith only 95 octane unleaded petrol priorto long-term storage of your vehicle.

FUELQUALITY - DIESEL

WARNING

Do not mix diesel with oil, petrol orother liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.

CAUTIONSDo not add kerosene, paraffin orpetrol to diesel. This could causedamage to the fuel system.

Use diesel that meets thespecification defined by EN590, orthe relevant national specification.

Note:We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel.

Note: The use of additives or otherengine treatments not approved by Fordis not recommended.

Note:We do not recommend theprolonged use of additives intended toprevent fuel waxing.

140

Fuel and refuelling

Page 143: Mondeo MK3 Book

Long-termstorage

Most diesel fuels contain bio-diesel, it isrecommended to fill the tank with purelymineral diesel (where available) or add ananti-oxidant prior to long-term storage ofyour vehicle exceeding twomonths. Yourdealer can help you with a suitableanti-oxidant.

CATALYTICCONVERTER

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustiblematerials. The exhaust

will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring use, and after you have switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.

Drivingwith a catalyticconverter

CAUTIONSAvoid running out of fuel.

Do not crank the engine for longperiods.

Do not run the engine when a sparkplug lead is disconnected.

Do not push-start or tow-start yourvehicle. Use booster cables. SeeUsingboostercables (page223).

Do not switch the ignition off whendriving.

FUEL FILLER FLAP

WARNINGSTake care when refuelling to avoidspilling any residual fuel from the fuelnozzle.

WARNINGSDo not use any kind of flames orheat near the fuel system. The fuelsystem is under pressure. There is

a risk of injury if the fuel system is leaking.

CAUTION

If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray the fuelfiller flap briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).

Note: Central locking also locks andunlocks the fuel filler flap. See Lockingand unlocking (page 37).

E86613

Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.

When you insert the fuel nozzle, a springloaded inhibitor will open if the correct sizenozzle is detected. This will prevent fillingup with the wrong fuel.

WARNING

Stop refuelling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in

the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could behazardous to other road users.

141

Fuel and refuelling

Page 144: Mondeo MK3 Book

E119080

Insert the fuel nozzle up to and includingthe first notch on the nozzle. Keep itresting on the cover of the fuel pipeopening.

WARNING

We recommend that you wait atleast 10 seconds before removingthe fuel nozzle to allow any residual

fuel to drain into the fuel tank.

E119081

Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.

A funnel is located in the sparewheel well.Use this when refilling with a fuel can.

REFUELLING

CAUTION

Do not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.

REFUELLING - E85

CAUTION

Do not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.

After refuelling, allow 5minutes of normalengine operation above 48 km/h (30mph) to reduce the risk of an increasedengine restart time.

FUELCONSUMPTION

The CO2 and fuel consumption figuresare derived from laboratory testsaccording to EECDirective 80/1268/EECand subsequent amendments and arecarried out by all vehicle manufacturers.

They are intended as a comparisonbetween makes and models of vehicles.They are not intended to represent thereal world fuel consumption you may getfrom your vehicle. Real world fuelconsumption is governedbymany factorsincluding; driving style, high speed driving,stop/start driving, air conditioning usage,the accessories fitted and towing etc.

Your Ford dealer can give you advice onimproving your fuel consumption.

TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS

142

Fuel and refuelling

Page 145: Mondeo MK3 Book

4-door and5-door

Fuel consumption figures

CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban

Variant

g/kml/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

1707.2 (39.2)5.6 (50.4)10 (28.2)

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT(Sigma) Stage IV(92kW/125PS), 5-speedmanual transmission

1546.6 (42.8)5.3 (53.3)8.8 (32.1)

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT(Sigma) Stage V(88kW/120PS), 5-speedmanual transmission

1586.8 (41.5)5.5 (51.4)9.1 (31)1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)Stage V (118kW/160PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1897.9 (35.8)6 (47.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage IV (107kW/145PS)

1847.9 (35.8)6 (47.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage V (107kW/145PS)

1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.7 (26.4)

2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)StageV (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion

1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.9 (26.4)

2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (176kW/240PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion

2239.3 (30.4)6.7 (42.2)13.8 (20.5)

2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage IV (118kW/161PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion

1545.8 (48.7)4.8 (58.9)7.5 (37.7)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV, 6-speedmanual transmission

143

Fuel and refuelling

Page 146: Mondeo MK3 Book

CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban

Variant

g/kml/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V, 6-speedmanual transmission

1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)

2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionECONETIC

1877.1 (39.8)5.5 (51.4)9.7 (29.1)

2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(100kW/136PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1495.6 (50.4)4.7 (60.1)7.2 (39.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V, 6-speedautomatic transmission

1656.2 (45.6)4.9 (57.6)8.4 (33.6)

2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(129kW/175PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1596 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.8 (36.2)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel (147kW/200PS)

Estate

Fuel consumption figures

CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban

Variant

g/kml/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

1707.2 (39.2)5.6 (50.4)10 (28.2)

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT(Sigma) Stage IV(92kW/125PS), 5-speedmanual transmission

144

Fuel and refuelling

Page 147: Mondeo MK3 Book

CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban

Variant

g/kml/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

1546.6 (42.8)5.3 (53.3)8.8 (32.1)

1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT(Sigma) Stage V(88kW/120PS), 5-speedmanual transmission

1586.8 (41.5)5.5 (51.4)9.1 (31)1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)Stage V (118kW/160PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1897.9 (35.8)6 (47.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage IV (107kW/145PS)

1847.9 (35.8)6 (47.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage V (107kW/145PS)

1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.7 (26.4)

2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)StageV (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion

1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.9 (26.4)

2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (176kW/240PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion

2239.3 (30.4)6.7 (42.2)13.8 (20.5)2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)(118kW/161PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1565.9 (47.9)4.9 (57.6)7.6 (37.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV

1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V, 6-speedmanual transmission

1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)

2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel (85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionECONETIC

145

Fuel and refuelling

Page 148: Mondeo MK3 Book

CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban

Variant

g/kml/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

l/100 km(mpg)

1877.1 (39.8)5.5 (51.4)9.7 (29.1)

2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(100kW/136PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1495.6 (50.4)4.7 (60.1)7.2 (39.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V, 6-speedautomatic transmission

1656.2 (45.6)4.9 (57.6)8.4 (33.6)

2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(129kW/175PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1596 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.8 (36.2)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel (147kW/200PS)

146

Fuel and refuelling

Page 149: Mondeo MK3 Book

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

CAUTION

Do not engage reverse gear whenthe vehicle ismoving. This can causedamage to the transmission.

E99067

On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

Selector lever positions

E80836

S

ParkP

ReverseR

NeutralN

DriveD

Sportmode andmanual shiftingS

WARNING

Apply the brakes beforemoving theselector lever and keep themapplied until you are ready to move

off.

Note: A cold engine has a higher idlespeed. This will increase the tendency foryour vehicle to creep when you haveselected a drive gear.

Press the button on the selector lever toselect reverse and park.

The selector lever position will be shownin the information display.

Park

WARNINGSSelect park only when your vehicleis stationary.

Apply the parking brake andselect park before leavingyour vehicle. Make sure that the

selector lever is latched in position.

Note:An audiblewarningwill sound if youopen the driver's door and you have notselected park.

In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels and the transmissionis locked. You can start the engine withthe selector lever in this position.

Reverse

WARNING

Select reverse only when yourvehicle is stationary and the engineis at idle speed.

147

Transmission

Page 150: Mondeo MK3 Book

Neutral

In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels but the transmissionis not locked. You can start the enginewith the selector lever in this position.

Drive

Select drive to shift automatically throughthe forward gears.

Sportmode andmanual shifting

2

1

E80837

S

S

Note: A shift will occur only when thevehicle speed and the engine speed areappropriate.

Note:When you select positionS, a gearchange may occur depending on theaccelerator pedal position in relation toactual vehicle speed.

Activate sport mode by moving theselector lever to position S. Sport modewill remain active until you shift manuallyup or down the gears.

Select manual shifting to shift manuallythrough the forward gears. Push theselector lever forwards to shift down andpull it backwards to shift up.

Drivemodes

The transmission will select theappropriate gear for optimumperformance based on ambienttemperature, road gradient, vehicle loadand driver input.

Hints on drivingwith anautomatic transmission

Moving off

1. Release the parking brake.

2. Release the brake pedal and pressthe accelerator pedal.

Stopping

1. Release the accelerator pedal andpress the brake pedal.

2. Apply the parking brake.

Kickdown

Press the accelerator pedal fully with theselector lever in the drive position to selectthe next lowest gear for optimumperformance. Release the acceleratorpedal when you no longer requirekickdown.

Emergency park positionrelease lever

Use the lever to move the selector leverfrom the park position in the event of anelectrical malfunction or if your vehicle hasa flat battery.

148

Transmission

Page 151: Mondeo MK3 Book

E87934

1. Remove the centre console sidepanel.

E87935

Note: The lever is yellow.

1. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver intothe slot and turn the screwdriverclockwise 90 degrees.

149

Transmission

Page 152: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

Disc brakes

Wet brake discs result in reduced brakingefficiency. Dab the brake pedal whendriving froma carwash to remove the filmof water.

ABS

WARNING

The ABS does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

TheABShelps you tomaintain full steeringand directional stability when you brakeheavily in an emergency, by preventingthe road wheels from locking.

HINTSONDRIVINGWITHABS

When the ABS is operating, the brakepedal will pulse. This is normal. Maintainpressure on the brake pedal.

The ABS will not eliminate the dangersinherent when:• you drive too close to the vehicle in

front of you.• the vehicle is aquaplaning.

• you take corners too fast.

• the road surface is poor.

PARKINGBRAKE

Applying the parking brake

E66567

WARNING

Make sure that the parking brake isapplied before you release the lever.

Note: Do not press the release buttonwhen you apply the parking brake.

1. Press the brake pedal firmly.2. Pull the parking brake lever upwards

to its fullest extent.

Parking on a hill

If you have to park facing uphill, select firstgear and turn the front wheels away fromthe kerb. If you have to park facingdownhill, select reverse gear and turn thefront wheels towards the kerb.

Releasing the parking brake

1. Press the brake pedal firmly.2. Pull the parking brake lever upwards

slightly, press the release button andpush the lever downwards.

150

Brakes

Page 153: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

Electronicstabilityprogramme(ESP)

WARNING

ESP does not relieve you of yourresponsibility to drive with due careand attention.

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

without ESPA

with ESPB

The ESP supports stability when thevehicle starts to slide away from yourintended path. This is performed bybraking individual wheels and reducingengine torque as needed.

The system also provides an enhancedtraction control function by reducingengine torque if thewheels spinwhen youaccelerate. This improves your ability topull away on slippery roads or loosesurfaces, and improves comfort by limitingwheel spin in hairpin bends.

Stabilitycontrol(ESP)warninglamp

The ESPwarning lampwill flash when thesystem is operating. SeeWarninglamps and indicators (page 80).

Emergency brake assist

WARNING

Emergency brake assist does notrelieve you of your responsibility todrive with due care and attention.

Emergency brake assist will detect whenyou brake heavily by measuring the rateat which you press the brake pedal. It willprovide maximum braking efficiency aslong as you press the pedal. Emergencybrake assist can reduce stoppingdistances in critical situations.

USINGSTABILITYCONTROL

Note: The system will be switched onautomatically every time you switch theignition on.

Vehicleswith stability control(ESP) switch

Press and hold the switch for one second.The switch will illuminate. A message willbe shown in the display. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).

Press the switch again to turn the systemon.

For item location: SeeQuickstart (page11).

151

Stability control

Page 154: Mondeo MK3 Book

Vehicleswithout stabilitycontrol (ESP) switch

Turn the system off and on using theinformation display. See Informationdisplays (page 84).

152

Stability control

Page 155: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

The system makes it easier to pull awaywhen the vehicle is on a slopewithout theneed to use the parking brake.

When the system is active, the vehiclewillremain stationary on the slope for a shorttime after you release the brake pedal.During this time, you have time to moveyour foot from the brake to theaccelerator pedal and pull away. Thebrakes are released automatically oncethe engine has developed sufficient driveto prevent the vehicle from rolling downthe slope. This is an advantage whenpulling away on a slope, for example froma car park ramp, traffic lights or whenreversing uphill into a parking space.

WARNING

The system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave thevehicle, always apply the parking

brake and select first or reverse gear.

USINGHILL STARTASSIST

The system can operate in eitherautomatic or manual mode. If you selectautomatic mode, the system is activatedautomatically when the vehicle is on aslope and you press the brake pedal. Ifyou select manual mode, you mustactivate the systemusing the brakepedal.

To set the system mode:

E70499

E74629

AutoOff

Hill Launch

Manual

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownbuttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Hill Launch and press theright arrow button.

4. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.IfOff is selected, the system isswitched off and cannot be activatedeither automatically or manually.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. To return to the trip computerdisplay directly, hold the left arrowbutton pressed.

153

Hill start assist

Page 156: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note:When the system is in manualactivation mode, only use the systemwhen pulling away uphill on gradientsgreater than 3%. If the vehicle is on theflat or on a downhill slope, an activesystem will make it difficult to pull awaysmoothly.

Activating the system

WARNINGSYoumust remain in the vehicle onceyou have activated the system. Anyattempt to leave the vehicle will

deactivate the system automatically.

The system is active only if themessage Hill LaunchAssistactive is displayed in the

information display. During all times youare responsible for controlling the vehicle,supervising the system and intervening,if required.

You can activate the system only if thefollowing conditions have been met:

• The engine is running.

• The system is switched on (automaticor manual mode).

• The parking brake is fully disengaged.

• On vehicleswithmanual transmission,the clutch pedal is pressed.

• On vehicles with automatictransmission, the driver door is closed.

• No failure mode is present.

To activate the system in automaticmode:

1. Press the brake pedal to bring thevehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.

2. If the sensors detect that the vehicleis on a slope and the right drivingdirection is selected (first gear if thevehicle is pointing uphill, reverse gearif the vehicle is pointing downhill), thesystemwill be activated automatically.Hill LaunchAssist active willappear in the display.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away forapproximately two to three seconds.

4. Pull away using the accelerator andclutch pedal. The brakes will bereleased automatically.

To activate the system in manual mode:

1. Press the brake pedal to bring thevehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.

2. Quickly jab the brake pedal further untilHill LaunchAssistactive appearsin the display. The system is nowactive.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away forapproximately two to three seconds.

4. Pull away using the accelerator andclutch pedal. The brakes will bereleased automatically.

WARNING

When the system is active and thesystemdetects a failure, the systemis deactivated and the message

Please use park brake! followed byHill LaunchA .not available will bedisplayed. The vehicle is still safe to bedriven and can be repaired during thenext service. The messageHill LaunchA. not available will also be displayedwith manual activation during a failure orif one of the activation criteria is not met.If you have switched the system off, nomessages will be displayed.

154

Hill start assist

Page 157: Mondeo MK3 Book

Deactivating the system

To deactivate the system, perform oneof the following:

• Apply the parking brake.

• Wait for two to three seconds until thesystem deactivates automatically.

• If a forward gear was selected whenthe system became active, selectreverse gear.

• If reverse gearwas selectedwhen thesystem became active, select aforward gear.

HillLaunchAssistoffwill appear in theinstrument cluster display.

155

Hill start assist

Page 158: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

The active suspension provides improvedhandling, comfort and stability bycontinuously adjusting the damperproperties to the current road and drivingconditions. This system in conjunctionwiththe ABS system offers the benefit ofpotentially shorter stopping distances onrough road surfaces.

Depending on your preferences anddriving style, you can choose betweenthree different settings:

Comfort

This provides a softer driving feel.

Normal

Normal setting.

Sport

This provides a harder, sportier ride.

USINGACTIVESUSPENSION

Selecting a setting

Note:After you select a setting, youmaynot immediately notice a difference in thevehicle's handling. The effect of thecontinuously controlleddampingdependson the road surface and drivingconditions.

E70475

You can change the setting while driving.

Systemmalfunction

The active suspension system will switchoff automatically if it malfunctions. Thesuspension will be set to a fail-safecondition that will enable you to continuedriving but you will not be able to changethe suspension setting. Have this checkedas soon as possible.

156

Active suspension

Page 159: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

WARNING

The parking aid does not relieve youof your responsibility to drive withdue care and attention.

CAUTIONSVehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by usmay notcorrectly detect obstacles.

The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.

The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.

The parking aid does not detectobstacles moving away from thevehicle. They will only be detected

shortly after they start to move towardsthe vehicle again.

Take particular care when reversingwith a tow ball arm or rear fittedaccessories e.g. a bicycle carrier, as

the rear parking aid will only indicate thedistance from thebumper to theobstacle.

If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thesensors briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).

Note: On vehicles fitted with a tow ballarm, the parking aid is deactivatedautomatically when any trailer lamps (orlighting boards) are connected to the13-pin socket via a trailer tow module wehave approved.

Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt,ice and snow. Do not clean with sharpobjects.

Note: The parking aid may emit falsetones if it detects a signal using the samefrequency as the sensors or if the vehicleis fully laden.

Note: The outer sensorsmay detect theside walls of a garage. If the distancebetween the outer sensor and the sidewall remains constant for three seconds,the tone will switch off. As you continue,the inner sensors will detect rearwardobjects.

USINGTHEPARKINGAID

Switching the parking aid onand off

Note: The parking aid switches offautomatically when you start the engineor when you exceed 16 km/h (10 mph).

Note: The front and rear sensors arealways activated or deactivated together.

The parking aid is per default off. Toswitch the parking aid on, press the switchin the instrument panel or select reversegear.

The light in the switch illuminates whenthe parking aid is activated.

To turn it off, press the switch again.

Manoeuvringwith the parkingaid

E72902

157

Parking aid

Page 160: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: If a high pitchwarning tone soundsfor three seconds and the light in theswitch is flashing, it indicates amalfunction. The system will be disabled.Have the system checked by properlytrained technicians.

You will hear an intermittent tone at adistance of up to approximately 150centimetres (59 inches) between theobstacle and rear bumper, 80 centimetres(31 inches) between the obstacle andfront bumper and 50 centimetres (20inches) to the side. Decreasing thedistance accelerates the intermittent tone.A continuous tone will start at a distanceof less than 30 centimetres (12 inches).

You will hear an alternating tone from thefront and rear if obstacles are closer than30 centimetres (12 inches) to the frontand rear bumpers.

158

Parking aid

Page 161: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

The camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.

WARNING

The camera does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

CAUTIONSIf you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thecamera briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).

Do not apply pressure to the camera.

Note: Keep the camera free from dirt,ice and snow. Do not clean with sharpobjects, degreaser, wax or organicproducts. Use only a soft cloth.

During operation, guide lines appear inthe displaywhich represent your vehicle'spath and approximate distance fromrearward objects.

USINGTHEREARVIEWCAMERA

WARNINGSThe operation of the camera mayvary depending on the ambienttemperature, vehicle and road

conditions.

The distances shown in the displaymay differ from the actual distance.

Do not place objects in front of thecamera.

The camera is located on the luggagecompartment lid near the handle.

E99105

Activatingtherearviewcamera

CAUTION

The camera may not detect objectsthat are close to the vehicle.

With the ignition and the audio unitswitched on, engage reverse gear. Theimage is displayed on the screen.

The camera may not operate correctly inthe following conditions:• Dark areas.

• Intense light.

• If the ambient temperature increasesor decreases rapidly.

• If the camera is wet, for example inrain or high humidity.

• If the camera's view is obstructed, forexample by mud.

Using the display

CAUTIONSObstacles above the camerapositionwill not be shown. Inspect the areabehind your vehicle if necessary.

159

Rear viewcamera

Page 162: Mondeo MK3 Book

CAUTIONSMarks are for general guidance only,and are calculated for vehicles inmaximum loadconditions on aneven

road surface.

The lines show a projected vehicle path(based on the current steering wheelangle) and the distance from the exteriormirrors and rear bumper.

E99458

A

B

C

D E

A

B

C

D

Exterior mirror clearance - 0.1metre (4 inches)

A

Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches)B

Amber - 1 metre (39 inches)C

160

Rear viewcamera

Page 163: Mondeo MK3 Book

Amber - 2 metres (79 inches)D

Amber - centre line of theprojected vehicle path

E

Note:When reversing with a trailer, thelines on the screen show the vehicledirection and not the trailer.

Deactivating the rear viewcamera

Note: Disengage reverse gear. Thedisplay will stay on for a short periodbefore switching off.

The system will automatically switch offonce the vehicle speed has reachedapproximately 15 km/h (9 mph).

Vehicleswith parking aid

The display will additionally show acoloured distance bar. This guideindicates the distance from the rearbumper to the detected obstacle.

These are colour coded as follows:• Green - 0.8 to 1.5 metres (31 to 59

inches).• Amber - 0.3 to 0.8 metre (12 to 31

inches).• Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches) or less.

161

Rear viewcamera

Page 164: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

Cruise control allows you to control yourspeed using the switches on the steeringwheel. You can use cruise control whenyou exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).

USINGCRUISECONTROL

WARNING

Do not use cruise control in heavytraffic, on twisty roads or when theroad surface is slippery.

Switching cruise control on

E70612

Setting a speed

E70615

Press the SET+ switch or the SET-switch to store andmaintain your currentspeed. The cruise control indicatorilluminates.

Changing the set speed

WARNING

When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The systemwill not apply the

brakes. Change down a gear and pressthe RES switch to assist the system inmaintaining the set speed.

Note: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed will notchange. When you release theaccelerator pedal, you will return to thespeed that you previously set.

Press the SET+ switch or the SET-switch to accelerate or decelerate.

Cancelling the set speed

E70614

Press the brake pedal or theCAN switch.The system will no longer control yourspeed. The cruise control indicator will gooff but the system will retain the speedthat you previously set.

162

Cruise control

Page 165: Mondeo MK3 Book

Resuming the set speed

E70616

Press theRES switch. The cruise controlindicator illuminates and the system willattempt to resume the speed that youpreviously set.

Switching cruise control off

E70613

Press theOFF switch. The systemwill notretain the speed that you previously set.The cruise control indicator will go off.

163

Cruise control

Page 166: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

The adaptive cruise control system isdesigned to help youmaintain a gap fromthe vehicle ahead or a set road speed ifthere is no slower vehicle ahead. Thesystem is intended to provide enhancedoperation of the vehicle when followingother vehicles which are in the same laneand travelling in the same direction.

WARNINGSAdaptive cruise control is not acollision warning or avoidancesystem. The separate forward alert

function provides a collision warning andmitigation feature. See Forward alertfunction (page 168). Youmust interveneif the system does not detect a vehicle infront.

Adaptive cruise control cannotcover all traffic, weather and roadconditions.

When driving you are responsibleformaintaining the correct distanceand speed, even when adaptive

cruise control is used. You must alwayspay attention to the traffic conditions andintervene when adaptive cruise control isnot maintaining a suitable speed orsuitable distance.

The adaptive cruise control doesnot brake for slow or stationaryvehicles.

When ACC is activated, you mayhear some unusual sounds duringautomatic braking. This is normal

and caused by the automatic brakingsystem.

The adaptive cruise control system isbased on the use of a radar sensor whichprojects a beam directly forward of thevehicle. This beam will detect any vehicleahead within the system's range.

The radar sensor is mounted behind thefront grille, immediately to the right of theFord badge (when viewed from the frontof the vehicle).

When using ACC, follow the strictguidelines below:

• Only use adaptive cruise control whenconditions are favourable, for exampleon motorways and main roads withsteady free flowing traffic.

• Do not use in poor visibility, specificallyfog, heavy rain, spray or snow.

• Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

• It is your responsibility to stay alert,drive safely and be in control of thevehicle at all times.

• Keep the front of the vehicle free fromdirt,metal badges or objects, includingvehicle front protectors and additionallights which may prevent the sensorfrom operating.

• Do not use ACC when entering orleaving a motorway.

The radar sensor has a limited field ofvision. In some situations it may detect avehicle other than the one expected ornot detect any vehicle at all.

164

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 167: Mondeo MK3 Book

Detection beam issues

E71621

Detection issues can occur:

• When driving on a different line to thevehicle in front (A).

• With vehicles that edge into your lanethat can only be detected once theyhave moved fully into your lane (B).Motorcyclesmay be detected late, ornot at all.

• There may be issues with thedetection of vehicles in front whengoing into and coming out of a bend(C). The detection beamwill not followsharp curves in the road.

WARNING

In these cases ACCmay brake lateor unexpectedly. The driver shouldstay alert and intervene if necessary.

Automatic brakingwith ACC

Adaptive cruise control will automaticallybrake for you, if required to maintain theset gapbetween your vehicle and theonedetected in front. This braking capacity islimited to approximately 30% of the totalmanual braking capacity to ensuresmooth and comfortable cruising. If thecar needs to brakemore heavily than this,and you do not intervene by brakingmanually, an alarm will sound and awarning symbol will be displayed in thecluster.

WARNING

You must take immediate actiononce alerted, as the ACC brakingwill not be sufficient to keep a safe

distance to the vehicle in front.

USINGACC

The system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.

Vehicleswithout speed limiter

E124908

A

C

E

D

B

ACC onA

ACC cancelB

ACC offC

165

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 168: Mondeo MK3 Book

ACC gap increaseD

ACC gap decreaseE

Vehicleswith speed limiter

E124909

A

C

E

D

B

ACC on/offA

ACC cancelB

Speed limiter on/offC

ACC gap increaseD

ACC gap decreaseE

Switching the systemon

Press switch A. The system is set tostandby mode.

Setting a speed

Note: The system must be in standbymode.

E133884

F

G

Set speed increaseF

Set speed decreaseG

Press switch F or switchG to select yourdesired cruise speed. The speed isdisplayed in the information display andstored as the set speed.

Changing the set speed

Note: Vehicle speed may be increasedand decreased at intervals of 5 km/h or5 mph.

Note: If the system does not react tothese changes the reason may be thatthe gap interval to the vehicle in frontprevents an increase in speed.

E133884

F

G

166

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 169: Mondeo MK3 Book

Press switch F to increase or switchG todecrease the set speed until the desiredset speed is shown in the informationdisplay. The vehicle speed will graduallychange to the selected speed.

Note: Smaller increases of 1 km/h or 1mph may be set by pressing switch H.

E133885

H

ACC resumeH

Setting the vehicle gap

CAUTION

Use the appropriate gap setting inaccordance with local trafficregulations.

Note: The gap setting is time dependantand therefore the distance willautomatically adjust with your speed. Forexample on a gap setting of four bars, thetime gap is 1.8 seconds. This will meanthat at a speed of 100 km/h (62mph), thedistance to the vehicle in front will bemaintained at 50 metres (164 feet).

Note: If the accelerator is depressed fora short period, for example whenovertaking, the system is temporarilydeactivated and then reactivated whenthe accelerator pedal is released. Amessage is displayed in the informationdisplay.

Note: The gap setting will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.

E82311

Thedistancebetween youand the vehicledetected in front is maintained by avariable setting. There are five stepswhichare represented by horizontal barsdisplayed in the information display. Onebar denotes the smallest gap and fivebars indicate the largest gap. These barsare shown empty when in standbymodeand filled when in active mode.

If no vehicle is detected in front, then onlyyour vehicle is displayed in the informationdisplay below the bars. The system willmaintain the set speed when conditionspermit. The set gap is maintained anddisplayed.

If a vehicle is detected by the sensor, thedisplay will show another vehicle abovethe horizontal bars:

E82312

This is a follow mode, and the system willaccelerate or decelerate as necessary tomaintain the set gap.

Press switch E to decrease the gap orswitch D to increase the gap. The gapselected will be represented by thenumber of bars in the display.

167

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 170: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: The recommended gap setting isfour to five bars.

Temporarily deactivating thesystem

Note: The system is cancelled when thegear lever is moved to a neutral positionor if the accelerator pedal or clutch isdepressed for a long period of time

Press either the brake or switch B tocancel the system. The systemwill returnto standbymode allowing you full manualcontrol of the vehicle. The set speed andgap setting are retained in the memory.

To resume adaptive cruise control pressswitchH. The systemwill resumewith thepreviously set speed and vehicle gapsetting if conditions permit.

Switching the systemoff

Vehicleswithout speed limiter

Press switch C to turn the system off.

Note:When deactivating the system bypressing switch C, the stored speed isnot retained.

Vehicleswith speed limiter

Press switch A to turn the system off.

Note:When deactivating the system bypressing switch A, the stored speed isnot retained.

Automatic deactivation

Note: If the engine speed drops too low,amessage is displayed in the informationdisplay instructing you to change down agear (manual transmission only). If you donot follow this recommendation then thesystemwill go into automatic deactivationmode.

Note: The system will not operate if theelectronic stability programme (ESP) hasbeen manually switched off.

The system is dependent on various othersafety systems, for example ABS andESP. If any of these systems aremalfunctioning or reacting to anemergency, the system is automaticallydeactivated.

In the event of automatic deactivation asignal will sound and the message isdisplayed in the information display SeeInformationmessages (page 97).You must then intervene and adapt yourdriving and speed to vehicles in front.

An automatic deactivation can be due tothe:

• vehicle speed falling below 30 km/h(20 mph)

• wheels losing traction

• brake temperature is high, forexamplewhendrivingonmountainousor hilly roads

• engine speed is too low

• radar sensor is covered

• parking brake or electric parking brake(EPB) is applied.

FORWARDALERTFUNCTION

The system assists you by warning of therisk of a collision, and reducing the severityof a collision with a vehicle in front. Thisworks by using two methods:

• You are alerted to a potential collisionso youmay brake earlier than normal.

• Brake support is activated to enablefull braking effectiveness.

168

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 171: Mondeo MK3 Book

The collision alerts will only occur if thesystem is switchedon, however thebrakesupport is always on and cannot beturned off. Warnings are both visual andaudible. Brake support is activatedautomatically if necessary to reduce thecollision speed. Thebrake support systemonly reduces the collision speed if youbrake immediately once alerted.

WARNINGSNever wait for a collision warning.When driving you are responsibleformaintaining the correct distance

and speed, even when the system isused.

The system will only react tovehicles in front travelling in thesame direction and will not react to

slow or stationary vehicles.

Never drive in a manner to provokethe system. The system is designedto assist in emergencies only.

The systemalerts you bywarning chimesand a visual warning in the informationdisplay. See Informationmessages(page 97).

When forward alert is deactivated thelamp is illuminated in the display. SeeWarninglampsandindicators (page80).

The systemdoes not operate in all drivingsituations and traffic, weather and roadconditions.

The radar sensor detects vehicles in frontthat are driving in the same direction asyou. If the risk of collision still increasesafter the initial warning then brake supportis activated. Brake support prepares thebrake system for rapid braking and thebrakes are applied gently, which may benoticed as a slight jerk. If the brake pedalis depressed sufficiently quickly thenbraking is implemented with full brakefunction, even if the force on the pedal islight.

CAUTION

Warnings may be triggered late, beabsent or triggered unnecessarily ifthe traffic situation means that the

radar sensor cannot accurately detect avehicle in front. The system uses thesame radar sensors as adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC) and therefore has the samelimitations. SeePrincipleofoperation(page 164).

Note: The system may be used with orwithout the ACC system being activated.

Switching forwardalertonandoff

SeeGeneral information (page 84).

Adjusting thewarningsensitivity

You may adjust the system warningsensitivity using the buttons on thesteering wheel. SeeGeneralinformation (page 84).

This controls how early the visual andaudible warning is activated.

169

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Page 172: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

WARNING

When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The systemwill not apply the

brakes but a warning will be given.

The system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.The set speed will become the effectivemaximum speed of the vehicle, but withthe option to temporarily exceed this limitif required.

USINGTHESPEEDLIMITER

The system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.

Press button A to switch the system onand off. The information display willprompt for a speed to be set.

Note: The set speed limit can beintentionally exceeded for a short periodif required, for example when overtaking.

E124874

A

B

Setting the speed limit

Use the cruise control switches to alterthe maximum speed setting.

E70615

Press the SET+ switch or the SET-switch to select your desired speed limit.The speed is indicated in the informationdisplay and stored as the set speed.

Press button B to cancel the limiter andplace it in standbymode. The informationdisplay will confirm deactivation byshowing the set speed crossed out.

E70616

Press the RES button to resume thelimiter. The information displaywill confirmthe system is active by showing the setspeed again.

Intentionally exceeding thespeed limit

Depress the accelerator hard close to thefull pedal travel and the limit willtemporarily deactivate. The system willreactivate once the vehicle speed dropsbelow the set speed.

170

Speed limiter

Page 173: Mondeo MK3 Book

Systemwarnings

If the set limit is accidentally exceeded theinformation display will show the setspeed flashing together with an audiblewarning chime.

If the set limit is intentionally exceeded theinformation display will show the setspeed crossed out.

171

Speed limiter

Page 174: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.

If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.

Take regular rest breaks as requiredand do not wait for the system towarn you if you feel tired.

Take rest breaks only where it issafe to do so.

Certain driving styles and behaviourmay result in the system issuing awarning even if you are not feeling

tired.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weatherconditions the system may notfunction. Rain, snow, spray and large

contrasts in lighting can all influence thesensor.

The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.

The systemmay not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.

The system may not operate onroads with sharp bends or narrowlanes.

Do not carry out windscreen repairsin the immediate area surroundingthe sensor.

CAUTIONSIf your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us,the system may not function

correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings,insects and snow or ice.

Note: The system is intended as a driveraid when driving on fast main roads andmotorways.

Note:The systemcalculates an alertnesslevel at vehicle speeds aboveapproximately 65 km/h (40 mph).

The system automatically monitors yourdriving behaviour using various inputsincluding the front camera sensor.

If the system detects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is adeterioration in your driving, the systemwill alert you.

USINGDRIVERALERT

Switching the systemon andoff

Note: The system status will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.

Activate the systemusing the informationdisplay. See Information displays(page 84).

Once activated the system will calculateyour alertness level based upon yourdriving behaviour in relation to the lanemarkings, and other factors.

Systemwarnings

Note: The systemwill not issuewarningsbelow approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).

172

Driver alert

Page 175: Mondeo MK3 Book

The warning system is in two stages. Atfirst the system issues a temporarywarning that a rest should be taken. Thismessagewill only appear for a short time.If a rest is not then taken a further warningmay be issued which will remain in theinformation display until cancelled.

PressOK on the steering wheel controlto remove the warning.

Systemdisplay

When active the system will runautomatically in the background and onlyissue warnings if required. You can viewthe status at any time using theinformation display.

Select Information then Driver Alertto show the status screen in theinformation display.

The alertness level is shown by six stepsas a coloured bar.

E131358

Alertness level is fine, no rest required.

E131359

Alertness level is critical, indicating that arest should be taken as soon as safelypossible.

The status bar will travel from left to rightas the calculated alertness leveldecreases. As the rest icon is approachedthe colour turns from green to yellow andthen finally red when a rest break mustbe taken.

• Green - No rest required.

• Yellow - First (temporary) warning.

• Red - Second warning.

Note: The alertness level will be shownin grey if the camera sensor cannot trackthe road lane markings or if the vehiclespeed drops below approximately 65km/h (40 mph).

Resetting the system

You can reset the system by either:• Switching the ignition off and on.

• Stopping the vehicle and thenopeningand closing the driver's door.

173

Driver alert

Page 176: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.

If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.

Lane markings may not always beproperly tracked by the sensor.Other structures or objects may

sometimes be incorrectly detected as alanemarking, resulting in a false ormissedwarning.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weatherconditions the system may notfunction. Rain, snow, spray and large

contrasts in lighting can all influence thesensor.

The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.

The systemmay not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.

The system may not operate onroads with sharp bends or narrowlanes.

Do not carry out windscreen repairsin the immediate area surroundingthe sensor.

If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us,the system may not function

correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings,insects and snow or ice.

Note: The system is intended as a driveraid when driving on fast main roads andmotorways.

Note: The system may not operateduring hard braking or acceleration and,when you are intentionally steering thevehicle.

Note: The system will operate with aminimum of one tracked lane marking.

Note:The systemwill only operate abovevehicle speeds of approximately 65 km/h(40 mph).

A sensor is mounted behind the interiorrear view mirror. It continuously monitorsconditions to alert you of unintentionallane drifting at high speeds.

The system will automatically detect andtrack the lane markings on the road. If itdetects that the vehicle is unintentionallydrifting towards the lane boundaries thena visual warning will be displayed in theinformation display. There is also awarning given in the form of a vibrationfelt through the steering wheel.

USINGLANEDEPARTUREWARNING

Switching the systemon andoff

Note:When the system is switched off,a warning indicator will remain illuminatedin the information display. SeeWarninglamps and indicators (page 80).Note: The system status and settingswillremain unchanged during ignition cycles.

174

Lane departurewarning

Page 177: Mondeo MK3 Book

E131360

A

B

System onA

System offB

Activate the system using the switcheson the indicator stalk.

Setting the steeringwheelvibration level

The system has three intensity levelswhich can be set using the informationdisplay. SeeGeneral information(page 84).

Setting the systemsensitivity

You can adjust how quickly the systemwarns you of a dangerous situation. Thesystem has two sensitivity levels whichcan be set using the information display.SeeGeneral information (page 84).

Systemwarnings

E131363

A column of lane markings is displayedeither side of the vehicle graphic.

The lane markings are colour coded asfollows:• Green - The system is ready to warn

you of any unintentional lanedeparture.

• Red - The vehicle is approaching or istoo close to the detected laneboundary. Take immediate safe actionto reposition the vehicle.

• Grey - The relevant lane boundary willbe suppressed.

Instanceswhere a lane boundarymay besuppressed:• Lane markings on the road may not

be detected by the sensor.• The direction indicator for that side of

the vehicle is on.• During hard acceleration and braking,

or if direct steering is applied.• Vehicle speed is outside the operating

limits• If there is an ABS or Stability Control

(ESP) intervention.• Narrow lane width.

If the lanemarkings turn red or a vibrationis felt through the steering wheel youmust take immediate and safe action toalign the vehicle and correct anyunintended lane drift.

175

Lane departurewarning

Page 178: Mondeo MK3 Book

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSUse load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.

Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.

Place luggage and other loads aslow and as far forward as possiblewithin the luggage or loadspace.

Do not drive with the tailgate or reardoor open. Exhaust fumes mayenter the vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.SeeVehicle identification (page

239).

Heavy loads, when placed in thepassenger compartment, should beon folded rear seats as shown. See

Rear seats (page 123).

CAUTIONSDonot allow items to contact the rearwindows.

Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rearwindows.

Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.

E97377

LUGGAGEANCHORPOINTS

Estate

E86912

176

Load carrying

Page 179: Mondeo MK3 Book

4-door and5-door

E86913

SLIDINGLOADSPACEFLOOR

WARNING

Do not slide the loadspace floorrearwards when the vehicle isstanding on an incline of 15 degrees

or more and facing uphill.

CAUTION

Themaximumpermissibleweight onthe sliding loadspace floor is 200kilogrammes (441 pounds).

The maximum permissible weight on theend of the sliding loadspace floor whenthe floor is in the fully extended position(slid outside the luggage compartment)is 120 kilogrammes (265 pounds).

E74810

Press the unlocking handle and pull theloadspace floor rearwards. It will stop andengage at a midway position.

E74811

To slide it out fully, press the unlockinghandle again and pull it out until it engagesin the end position.

To slide it forwards, press the unlockinghandle and push it forwards.

Note: You do not have to exert as muchpressure on the unlocking handle if youpush the loadspace floor forwards slightlywhen operating it.

177

Load carrying

Page 180: Mondeo MK3 Book

Storage compartment

A storage compartment is located in thefloor at the rear of the luggagecompartment.

To gain access to the storagecompartment, lift up the sliding loadspacefloor as follows:

E74812

1

2

E74813

3

1. Press the unlocking handle and pullthe loadspace floor rearwards a shortway.

2. Lift up the rear of the floor (1).3. Push the floor forwards until it

engages at the front (2).4. Release the support leg from the clip

on the underside of the floor.5. Insert the end into the square retainer

in the left-hand rail (3).6. Lift the storage compartment cover

using the loop.

To return the loadspace floor to thenormal position:

1. Hold the floor with one hand andrelease the support leg with the otherhand.

2. Insert the support leg back into theclip.

178

Load carrying

Page 181: Mondeo MK3 Book

3. Lower the floor.4. Press the unlocking handle and pull

the loadspace floor rearwards until itdrops into position on the rails.

REARUNDERFLOORSTORAGE

Vehicleswith a slidingloadspace floor

Raise the loadspace floor to gain accessto the storage compartment. SeeSliding loadspace floor (page 177).

Vehicleswithout a slidingloadspace floor

E87689

LUGGAGECOVERS

WARNING

Donot place objects on the luggagecover.

E112571

Pull out the cover until it locks.

E112572

Release it from the retaining points bypressing below the handle. Let it roll slowlyback into the case.

179

Load carrying

Page 182: Mondeo MK3 Book

E112588

To remove or install the cover, push eitherend of the case inwards.

Stowing the luggage cover -vehicleswith tyre repair kit

Space is provided under the luggagecompartment floor.

CARGONETS

Luggage retention net

Installing the net

E87052

1. Push the ends of the upper bartowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.

E87053

2. Attach the net to the luggage anchorpoints. See Luggage anchorpoints (page 176).

E87054

3. Tighten the belts.

180

Load carrying

Page 183: Mondeo MK3 Book

Removing the net

E87135

1. Release the belts.

2. Remove the net from the luggageanchor points.

3. Remove the upper bars.

ROOFRACKSANDLOADCARRIERS

Roof rack

WARNINGSIf you use a roof rack, the fuelconsumption of your vehicle will behigher and you may experience

different driving characteristics.

Read and follow themanufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting aroof rack.

CAUTION

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible roof load of 75kilogrammes (165 pounds) (including

the roof rack).

Check the security of the roof rack andtighten its fittings as follows:

• before starting

• after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)

• at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)intervals.

Tominimisewindnoisewhen the roof rackis not in use, cross rails should be movedrearwards and placed together. Toreduce fuel consumption, cross railsshould be removed when not in use.

DOGGUARD

CAUTION

Keep a distance of at least onecentimetre between the dog guardand the seats in front of it.

Installingbehindthefrontseats

E86848

1. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.

181

Load carrying

Page 184: Mondeo MK3 Book

E87782

2. Attach the dog guard to the loweranchor points. Do not tighten thescrews.

E87783

3. Attach the grille to the lower bar withthe handwheels. Do not tighten thehandwheels.

4. Tighten the screws at the loweranchor points.

5. Tighten the handwheels.

Installingbehindtherearseats

E86848

1. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.

E104424

182

Load carrying

Page 185: Mondeo MK3 Book

2. Remove two screws from both theluggageanchorpoints. SeeLuggageanchor points (page 176).

3. Attach the lower bar to the grille withthe handwheels. Do not tighten thehandwheels.

4. Attach the dog guard lower bar to theluggage anchor points, secure withthe new supplied screws.

5. Tighten the handwheels.

Remove in the reverse order.

LOADRETAININGFIXTURES

WARNING

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible load of 60 kilogrammes(132 pounds) on two load retaining

fixtures and 30 kilogrammes (66 pounds)on one.

Check the security of the load retainingfixtures and tighten its fittings as follows:

• before starting

• after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)

• at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)intervals.

Installing the load retainingfixtures

E75003

Installing the load bracket

WARNINGSInstall the load bracket with thelongest section towards the rear ofthe vehicle. If you install it the wrong

way round, it may not hold the box inplace in the event of an accident.

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible load of 20 kilogrammes(44 pounds).

183

Load carrying

Page 186: Mondeo MK3 Book

1

23 3

E76378

1. Turn the box over.

2. Position the load bracket.

3. Secure the load bracket with fourscrews.

E76379

4. Slide the captured bolts onto the loadretaining fixture.

E76380

5. Secure the load bracket with the twowing nuts.

6. Remove in the reverse order.

184

Load carrying

Page 187: Mondeo MK3 Book

TOWINGATRAILER

WARNINGSDo not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph).

The rear tyre pressures must beincreased by 0.2 bar (3 psi) abovespecification. See Technical

specifications (page 235).

Do not exceed themaximumgrosstrain weight stated on the vehicleidentification plate. See Vehicle

identification (page 239).

CAUTION

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible nose weight, i.e. verticalweight on the tow ball, of 90

kilogrammes (198 pounds).

Note: Not all vehicles are suitable orapproved to have tow bars fitted. Checkwith your dealer first.

Place loads as low and central to theaxle(s) of the trailer as possible. If you aretowing with an unladen vehicle, the loadin the trailer should be placed toward thenose, within the maximum nose load, asthis gives the best stability.

The stability of the vehicle to trailercombination is very much dependant onthe quality of the trailer.

In high altitude regions above 1 000metres (3 281 feet), the stipulatedmaximum permitted gross train weightmust be reduced by 10% for everyadditional 1 000 metres (3 281 feet).

Steep gradients

WARNING

The overrun brake on a trailer is notcontrolled by ABS.

Change down a gear before you reach asteep downhill gradient.

DETACHABLE TOWBALL

WARNINGSWhen not in use, always transportthe tow ball arm securely fastenedin the luggage compartment.

Take special care when fitting thetow ball arm as the safety of thevehicle and the trailer depends on

this.

Do not use any tools for mountingor dismounting the tow ball arm. Donot modify the trailer coupling. Do

not disassemble or repair the towball arm.

E71328

A 13-pin trailer socket and the towball armseat are provided underneath the rearbumper. Turn the trailer socket downthrough 90 degrees until it engages in theend position.

185

Towing

Page 188: Mondeo MK3 Book

Unlocking the towball armmechanism

E713292

1

3

1. Remove the protecting cap (1). Insertthe key and turn it clockwise to unlock(2).

2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out and turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks (3).

3. The redmark on the handwheel mustalign with the green mark on the towball.

4. Release the handwheel. The tow ballarm is unlocked.

Inserting the towball arm

1

2E71330

WARNING

The tow ball arm may only beinsertedwhencompletely unlocked.

1. Pull out the plug.2. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and

press it upwards until it engages (1).Do not hold your hand near thehandwheel.

3. The green mark on the handwheelmust alignwith the greenmark on thetow ball.

4. To lock, turn the key anti-clockwiseand remove the key (2).

5. Pull the protecting cap from the keybow and press it onto the lock.

186

Towing

Page 189: Mondeo MK3 Book

Drivingwith a trailer

E71331

A

B

WARNING

If any of the below conditionscannot be met, do not use the towbar and have it checked by a

properly trained technician.

Before starting your journey, make surethat the tow ball arm is properly locked.Check:

• the green marks are aligned.

• the handwheel (A) is correctly fittedto the tow ball arm.

• you have removed the key (B).• the towball arm is securely positioned.

It must not move when jerked.

Removing the towball arm

3

1E71332

2

1. Unhitch the trailer.2. Remove the protecting cap. Press the

cap into the key bow. Insert the keyand unlock (1).

3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out, turn it clockwiseagainst the stop (2) and remove thetow ball arm (3).

4. Release the handwheel.

When unlocked in this way, the tow ballarm can be reinserted at any time.

187

Towing

Page 190: Mondeo MK3 Book

Drivingwithout a trailer

E94771

1

1. Remove the tow ball arm.2. Insert the plug into its seat (1).

WARNING

Never unlock the tow ball arm withthe trailer attached.

Maintenance

CAUTION

Remove the towball armandprotectthe seat with the plug before steamcleaning your vehicle.

Keep the system clean. Periodicallylubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, andlocking balls with resin-free grease or oiland the lock with graphite.

Keep a note of the key number. In caseof loss, replacement keys are availablefrom the manufacturer by stating the4-digit key number.

188

Towing

Page 191: Mondeo MK3 Book

RUNNING-IN

Tyres

WARNING

New tyres need to be run-in forapproximately 500 kilometres (300miles). During this time, you may

experience different drivingcharacteristics.

Brakes and clutch

WARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 150kilometres (100 miles) in town and

for the first 1 500 kilometres (1 000 miles)on motorways.

Engine

CAUTION

Avoid driving too fast during the first1 500 kilometres (1 000 miles). Varyyour speed frequently and change

up through the gears early. Do not labourthe engine.

GENERALDRIVINGPOINTS- VEHICLESWITH: SPORTSSUSPENSION

The distance between the underside ofyour vehicle and the ground is reducedcompared to other models. Drive withextreme care to avoid damage to yourvehicle.

COLDWEATHERPRECAUTIONS

The functional operation of somecomponents and systems can beaffected at temperatures below -30°C(-22°F).

DRIVINGTHROUGHWATER

Driving throughwater

CAUTIONSDrive throughwater in an emergencyonly, and not as part of normaldriving.

Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.

In an emergency, the vehicle can bedriven throughwater to amaximumdepthof 200 mm and at a maximum speed of10 km/h (6mph). Extra caution should beexercised when driving through flowingwater.

When driving in water, maintain a lowspeed and do not stop the vehicle. Afterdriving through water, and as soon as itis safe to do so:• Depress the brake pedal lightly and

check that full brake function isachieved.

• Check that the horn works.

• Check that the vehicle's lights are fullyoperational.

• Check the power assistanceof the steering system.

189

Driving hints

Page 192: Mondeo MK3 Book

FIRSTAIDKIT

Space is provided in the luggagecompartment.

4-door

E87654

5-door

E87655

Estate

E87656

WARNINGTRIANGLE

4-door and5-door

E87657

Space is provided in the luggagecompartment.

Estate and vehicleswith tyrerepair kit

Space is provided under the carpet.

See Rear under floor storage (page179).

190

Emergency equipment

Page 193: Mondeo MK3 Book

FUSEBOXLOCATIONS

Engine compartment fuse box

E72588

Central fuse box

All vehicles

E72589

1. Pinch the retaining clips to release thecover.

E72590

2. Remove the cover.

3. Turn the knob through 90 degrees andrelease the fuse box from the retainingbracket.

4. Lower the fuse box cover and pull ittowards you.

5. Install in the reverse order.

Rear fuse box - 4-door and5-door

1

E87481

1. Remove the cover.

191

Fuses

Page 194: Mondeo MK3 Book

2

E87482

2. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.

Rear fuse box - Estate

1

2

E87479

1. Release the catches.

2. Remove the cover.

3

3

3

E87480

3. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.

CHANGINGAFUSE

WARNINGSDo not modify the electrical systemof your vehicle in any way. Haverepairs to the electrical system and

the replacement of relays andhigh currentfuses carried out by a properly trainedtechnician.

Switch the ignition and all electricalequipment off before touching orattempting to change a fuse.

CAUTION

Fit a replacement fusewith the samerating as the one you have removed.

Note: You can identify a blown fuse bya break in the filament.

Note: All fuses, except high currentfuses, are a push fit.

Note: A fuse puller is located in theengine compartment fuse box.

192

Fuses

Page 195: Mondeo MK3 Book

FUSESPECIFICATIONCHART

Engine compartment fuse box

E75525

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Transmission control module (AWF21)10F1

Transmission control module (MPS6)15F1

193

Fuses

Page 196: Mondeo MK3 Book

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Glow plug monitoring (diesel engines)5F2

Vaporiser glow plug monitoring (2.0L Duratorq-TDCiand 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F2

Engine cooling fan - twin fan (2.3L Duratec-HE)701F3

Electric hydraulic power steering (EHPAS) ( 1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V, 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and2.0L Duratorq-TDCi)

801F3

Glow plugs60F4

Engine cooling fan60F5

Engine cooling fan (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)70F5

HEGOsensors 1 (enginemanagement), variable valvetiming (engine management), CMS sensor, Oxygensensor

10F6

Vaporiser glow plug20F6

Relay coils5F7

Powertrain control module10F8

Powertrain control module (2.0L EcoBoost SCTi and2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)20F8

Powertrain control module (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)15F8

MAF Sensor, Swirl Control Valve , Fuel Injectors, CCVPTC Heater, Variable Intake Valve, Variable ExhaustValve (engine management)

10F9

Fuel pump vaporiser (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F9

MAFSensor, EGRbypass Valve , Fuel pump vaporiser(2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) (enginemanagement)7.5F9

Cannister purge valve, Degas valve, TMAF sensor(1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)7.5F9

Engine control module10F10

194

Fuses

Page 197: Mondeo MK3 Book

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

PCV Valve, VCV Valve, Water in Fuel Sensor, SonicPurge Valve, Swirl Control Valve, Variable Intake Valve,EGR Valve, IVVT Oil Control Valve (engine manage-ment)

10F11

MAF sensor,Water in Fuel Sensor, Active grille shutter(2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F11

Fuel rail pressure, Fuel metering unit, Fuel pumpvaporiser, Active grille shutter (2.2L Duratorq-TDCiStage V) (engine management)

7.5F11

Waste gate valve, Active grille shutter (1.6L EcoBoostSCTi)7.5F11

Ignition coils (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L EcoBoostSCTi)15F12

EGR Throttle, Variable Turbo Control Valve, Coil onPlug; Canister Purge Valve, Power Steering PressureSwitch (engine management)

10F12

Relay coils (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F12

Air conditioning relay15F13

Diesel filter heater (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)15F14

Brake vacuum pump20F14

HEGO sensors (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)10F14

Starter relay40F15

Diesel auxiliary heater (PTC)80F16

Central fuse box supply A60F17

Central fuse box supply B60F18

Rear fuse box supply C60F19

Rear fuse box supply D60F20

Not used–F21

Windscreen wiper module30F22

Heated rear window30F23

195

Fuses

Page 198: Mondeo MK3 Book

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Headlamp washer30F24

ABS valves30F25

ABS pump40F26

Fuel fired heater30F27

Heater blower40F28

Not used–F29

Not used–F30

Horn15F31

Fuel fired heater - remote control5F32

Light switch module, engine compartment fuse boxcoils5F33

Heated windscreen (left-hand side)40F34

Heated windscreen (right-hand side)40F35

ABS5F36

Heated front washer jets10F37

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)5F38

Adaptive front lighting system (AFS)15F39

Not used–F40

Instrument panel20F41

Engine controlmodule, transmission controlmodule,electric hydraulic power steering (EHPAS) 15 feed10F42

Headlamp levelling, adaptive front lighting system(AFS)5F43

Not used-F44

Rear window wiper15F45

1Fit a replacement with the same rating as the one you have removed.

196

Fuses

Page 199: Mondeo MK3 Book

Central fuse box

E124888

A B

Left-hand driveA

Right-hand driveB

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Steering wheel module7.5F1

Instrument cluster5F2

Interior lamps10F3

Engine immobiliser5F4

197

Fuses

Page 200: Mondeo MK3 Book

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)7.5F5

Rain sensor5F6

Cigar lighter20F7

Fuel filler flap unlock supply10F8

Windscreen washers - rear15F9

Windscreen washers - front15F10

Luggage compartment release supply10F11

Fuel filler flap lock supply10F12

Fuel pump20F13

Fuel pump (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)7.5F13

Remote frequency receiver, Interior motion sensor5F14

Ignition switch5F15

Battery backup sounder (alarm system), OBD II(board computer diagnostics)5F16

Steering wheel vibration actuator5F17

SRS (airbag) supply10F18

ABS, yaw rate sensor (ESP), electric parking brake(EPB), accelerator pedal supply7.5F19

Electronic feed, electronic fuse, Auto-dimmingmirror,lane departure warning7.5F20

Audio system (including voice control)15F21

Brake lamp switch5F22

Sunroof20F23

Steering column unit, climate control module5F24

198

Fuses

Page 201: Mondeo MK3 Book

Rear fuse box

4-door and5-door

E87483

199

Fuses

Page 202: Mondeo MK3 Book

Estate

E75526

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Door module (left-hand front) (window up/down,central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)25FA1

Door module (right-hand front) (window up/down,central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)25FA2

Door module (left-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA3

200

Fuses

Page 203: Mondeo MK3 Book

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Door module (right-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA4

Rear locking (without rear door modules)10FA5

Auxiliary power socket15FA6

Relay coils5FA7

Keyless vehicle module20FA8

Not used–FA9

Electric driver's seat30FA10

Accessories, trailer module20FA11

Not used–FA12

Parking aid module, Blind spot information system(BLIS)5FB1

Suspension module15FB2

Heated driver's seat15FB3

Heated front passenger seat15FB4

Left-hand rear heated seat15FB5

Not used-FB6

Right-hand rear heated seat15FB7

Not used–FB8

Electric front passenger seat30FB9

Anti-theft alarm horn10FB10

Not used–FB11

Not used–FB12

Not used-FC1

Not used-FC2

Not used-FC3

Not used-FC4

CD changer, rear seat entertainment system7.5FC5

201

Fuses

Page 204: Mondeo MK3 Book

Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse

Not used-FC6

Seat memory function module5FC7

Keyless entry20FC8

Audio amplifier20FC9

Sony audio system10FC10

Not used–FC11

Not used–FC12

202

Fuses

Page 205: Mondeo MK3 Book

TOWINGPOINTS

Towing eye location

The screw-in towing eye is located in thespare wheel well.

The towing eye must always be carriedin the vehicle.

Installing the towing eye

CAUTION

The screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make

sure that the towing eye is fully tightened.

Front towing eye

E87280

Rear towing eye

E87282

Insert your finger into the hole on theunderside of the cover and prise off thecover. Install the towing eye.

TOWINGTHEVEHICLEONFOURWHEELS

All vehicles

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition on when yourvehicle is being towed. The steeringlock will engage and the direction

indicators and brake lamps will not workif you do not.

The brake servo and the powersteering pump do not operateunless the engine is running. Press

the brake pedal harder and allow forincreased stopping distances and heaviersteering.

CAUTIONSToo much tension in the tow ropecould cause damage to your vehicleor the vehicle that is towing.

203

Vehicle recovery

Page 206: Mondeo MK3 Book

CAUTIONSDo not use a rigid tow bar on thefront towing eye.

Select neutral when your vehicle isbeing towed.

Drive off slowly and smoothly withoutjerking the vehicle that is towing.

Vehicleswith automatictransmission

CAUTIONSIf a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) anda distance of 20 kilometres (12miles)is to be exceeded the drive wheels

must be lifted clear of the ground.

It is recommended not to tow withthe drive wheels on the ground.However, if it is required to move the

vehicle from a dangerous location, do nottow your vehicle faster than 20 km/h (12mph) or further than 20 kilometres (12miles).

Do not tow your vehicle backwards.

In the event of a mechanical failureof the transmission the drive wheelsmust be lifted clear of the ground.

Do not tow your vehicle if theambient temperature is below 0ºC(32ºF).

204

Vehicle recovery

Page 207: Mondeo MK3 Book

GENERAL INFORMATION

Have your vehicle serviced regularly tohelp maintain its roadworthiness andresale value. There is a large network ofFord Authorised Repairers that are thereto help you with their professionalservicing expertise. We believe that theirspecially trained technicians are bestqualified to service your vehicle properlyand expertly. They are supported by awide range of highly specialised toolsdeveloped specifically for servicing yourvehicle.

In addition to regular servicing, werecommend that you carry out thefollowing additional checks.

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition off beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.

Do not touch the electronic ignitionsystem parts after you haveswitched the ignition on orwhen the

engine is running. The system operatesat high voltage.

Keep your hands and clothing clearof the engine cooling fan. Undercertain conditions, the fan may

continue to run for several minutes afteryou have switched the engine off.

CAUTION

When carrying out maintenancechecks,make sure that filler caps arefitted securely.

Daily checks

• Exterior lamps.

• Interior lamps.

• Warning lamps and indicators.

Checkwhen refuelling

• Engine oil level. See Engine oilcheck (page 216).

• Brake fluid level. See Brake andclutch fluid check (page 217).

• Washer fluid level. SeeWasherfluidcheck (page 218).

• Tyre pressures (when cold). SeeTechnical specifications (page235).

• Tyre condition. SeeTyrecare (page233).

Monthly checks

• Engine coolant level (engine cold).See Engine coolant check (page216).

• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.

• Power steering fluid level. SeePowersteeringfluidcheck (page217).

• Air conditioning operation.

• Parking brake operation.

• Horn operation.

• Tightness of wheel nuts. SeeTechnical specifications (page235).

205

Maintenance

Page 208: Mondeo MK3 Book

OPENINGANDCLOSINGTHEBONNET

Opening the bonnet

E73698

E87785

Raise the bonnet slightly and move thecatch towards the left-hand side of thevehicle.

E87786

Open the bonnet and support it with thestrut.

Closing the bonnet

WARNING

Make sure that the bonnet is closedproperly.

Lower the bonnet and allow it to dropfrom under its own weight for the last20 – 30 centimetres (8 - 11 inches).

206

Maintenance

Page 209: Mondeo MK3 Book

ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 1.6LDURATEC-16VTI-VCT (SIGMA)

A C

GJ F

D EB

HIE87714

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 216).B

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

C

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 223).D

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 191).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 218).G

Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 216).H

Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page217).

I

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 216).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

207

Maintenance

Page 210: Mondeo MK3 Book

ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW-1.6LECOBOOSTSCTI(SIGMA)

E132430

A

J I G FH

B C D E

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 216).B

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

C

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 223).D

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 191).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

208

Maintenance

Page 211: Mondeo MK3 Book

Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 218).G

Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 216).H

Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page217).

I

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 216).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 2.0LDURATEC-HE(MI4)

A C

GJ F

D EB

HIE73231

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 216).B

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

C

Battery. See Using booster cables (page 223).D

Engine compartment fuse box. SeeFusespecificationchart (page 193).E

209

Maintenance

Page 212: Mondeo MK3 Book

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 218).G

Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 216).H

Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page217).

I

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 216).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW-2.0LECOBOOSTSCTI(MI4)

A C

GHJ I F

D EB

E124921

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 216).B

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

C

Battery. See Using booster cables (page 223).D

210

Maintenance

Page 213: Mondeo MK3 Book

Engine compartment fuse box. SeeFusespecificationchart (page 193).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 218).G

Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 216).H

Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page217).

I

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 216).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 2.3LDURATEC-HE(MI4)

E81313

A C

GJ F

D EB

HI

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 216).B

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

C

211

Maintenance

Page 214: Mondeo MK3 Book

Battery. See Using booster cables (page 223).D

Engine compartment fuse box. SeeFusespecificationchart (page 193).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 218).G

Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 216).H

Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page217).

I

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 216).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 2.0LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW)DIESEL

A C

GJ I F

D EB

HE73234

212

Maintenance

Page 215: Mondeo MK3 Book

A C

GHJ I F

D EB

E124913

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 216).B

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

C

Battery. See Using booster cables (page 223).D

Engine compartment fuse box. SeeFusespecificationchart (page 193).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 218).G

Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 216).H

Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page217).

I

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 216).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

213

Maintenance

Page 216: Mondeo MK3 Book

ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 2.2LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW)DIESEL

A C

GJ F

D EB

HIE87715

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive): See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

A

Engine oil filler cap1: See Engine oil check (page 216).B

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive): See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 217).

C

Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 223).D

Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 191).E

Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary.F

Screen washer fluid reservoir: SeeWasher fluid check (page 218).G

Engine oil dipstick1: See Engine oil check (page 216).H

Power steering fluid reservoir: See Power steering fluid check (page217).

I

Engine coolant reservoir: See Engine coolant check (page 216).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

214

Maintenance

Page 217: Mondeo MK3 Book

ENGINEOILDIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATEC-16V TI-VCT(SIGMA)

E95540

BA

MINA

MAXB

ENGINEOILDIPSTICK - 1.6LECOBOOSTSCTI (SIGMA)

A B

E134114

MINA

MAXB

ENGINEOILDIPSTICK-2.0LDURATEC-HE (MI4)/2.3LDURATEC-HE (MI4)

E92036

A B

MINA

MAXB

ENGINEOILDIPSTICK-2.0LECOBOOSTSCTI (MI4)

E124917

A B

E134040

A B

MINA

MAXB

215

Maintenance

Page 218: Mondeo MK3 Book

ENGINEOILDIPSTICK-2.0LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW)DIESEL/2.2LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW)DIESEL

E95543

BA

MINA

MAXB

ENGINEOILCHECK

CAUTION

Do not use oil additives or otherengine treatments. Under certainconditions, they could damage the

engine.

Note: The oil consumption of newengines reaches its normal level afterapproximately 5 000 kilometres (3 000miles).

Checking the oil level

CAUTION

Make sure that the level is betweentheMIN and theMAXmarks.

Note:Check the level before starting theengine.

Note:Make sure that your vehicle is onlevel ground.

Note:Oil expandswhen it is hot. The levelmay therefore extend a few millimetresbeyond theMAXmark.

Remove the dipstick and wipe it with aclean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstickand remove it again to check the oil level.

If the level is at theMINmark, top upimmediately.

Topping up

WARNINGSOnly top upwhen the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.

Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.

Remove the filler cap.

CAUTION

Do not top up further than theMAXmark.

Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See Technicalspecifications (page 218).

Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feela strong resistance.

ENGINECOOLANTCHECK

Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinsethe affected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

CAUTION

Make sure that the level is betweentheMIN and theMAXmarks.

216

Maintenance

Page 219: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot.The level may therefore extend beyondtheMAXmark.

If the level is at theMINmark, top upimmediately.

Topping up

WARNINGSOnly top upwhen the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.

Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.

Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is hot.Wait for the engineto cool down.

Undiluted coolant is flammable andmay ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.

CAUTIONSIn an emergency, you can add justwater to the cooling system to reacha vehicle service station. Have the

system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

Prolonged use of incorrect dilution ofthe coolant can cause enginedamage fromcorrosion, overheating

or freezing.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressurewill escape slowly as you unscrew thecap.

CAUTION

Do not top up further than theMAXmark.

Top up with a 50/50 mixture of coolantand water using fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See Technicalspecifications (page 218).

BRAKEANDCLUTCHFLUIDCHECK

WARNINGSDo not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinsethe affected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

If the level is at theMINmark, havethe system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as

possible.

Note: The brake and the clutch systemsare supplied from the same reservoir.

Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See Technicalspecifications (page 218).

POWERSTEERINGFLUIDCHECK

WARNING

Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinsethe affected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

CAUTION

Make sure that the level is betweentheMIN and theMAXmarks.

If the level is at theMINmark, top upimmediately.

Topping up

Remove the filler cap.

CAUTION

Do not top up further than theMAXmark.

217

Maintenance

Page 220: Mondeo MK3 Book

Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See Technicalspecifications (page 218).

WASHERFLUIDCHECK

Note: The front and rearwasher systemsare supplied from the same reservoir.

When topping up, use a mixture ofwasher fluid and water to help preventfreezing in cold weather and improve thecleaning capability. We recommend thatyou use only high quality washer fluid.

For information on fluid dilution, refer tothe product instructions.

TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle fluids

CAUTION

Do not use fluids which do not meet the specifications or requirements defined.Use of unsuitable fluidsmay lead to damagewhich is not covered by yourWarranty.

SpecificationRecommended fluidItem

WSS-M2C913-CCastrol or Ford Engine OilEngine oil

WSS-M2C204-A2Ford Power Steering FluidPower steering fluid

WSS-M97B44-DFord or Motorcraft Anti-freeze Super Plus PremiumCoolant

WSS-M6C57-A2Ford Super DOT 4 BrakeFluidBrake fluid

Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, whichgives a fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.

Toppinguptheoil: If you are unable to find an oil thatmeets the specification definedbyWSS-M2C913-C, youmust useSAE5W-30 thatmeets the specification definedby ACEAA5/B5.

Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine crankingperiods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emissionlevels.

Castrol engine oil recommended.

E115472

218

Maintenance

Page 221: Mondeo MK3 Book

Capacities

Capacity in litres(gallons)ItemVariant

MAX markPower steering systemAll

3.8 (0.8)Windscreen and rearwindow washer systemAll

4.1 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

6 (1.3)Engine cooling system1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

70 (15.4)Fuel tank1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

4.1 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

6.5 (1.4)Engine cooling system1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

70 (15.4)Fuel tank1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

4.3 (1.0)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L Duratec-HE

3.9 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L Duratec-HE

6.2 (1.4)Engine cooling system2.0L Duratec-HE

70 (15.4)Fuel tank2.0L Duratec-HE

5.4 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

5.1 (1.1)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

approx. 6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling system2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

70 (15.4)Fuel tank2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

4.3 (1.0)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.3L Duratec-HE

219

Maintenance

Page 222: Mondeo MK3 Book

Capacity in litres(gallons)ItemVariant

3.9 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.3L Duratec-HE

6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling system2.3L Duratec-HE

70 (15.4)Fuel tank2.3L Duratec-HE

5.5 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi

5 (1.1)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi

8.1 (1.8)Engine cooling system2.0L Duratorq-TDCi

70 (15.4)Fuel tank2.0L Duratorq-TDCi

6 (1.3)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi

5.4 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi

8.4 (1.9)Engine cooling system2.2L Duratorq-TDCi

70 (15.4)Fuel tank2.2L Duratorq-TDCi

220

Maintenance

Page 223: Mondeo MK3 Book

CLEANINGTHEEXTERIOR

WARNING

If you use a car wash with a waxingcycle, make sure that you removethe wax from the windscreen.

CAUTIONSPrior to using a car wash facilitycheck the suitability of it for yourvehicle.

Some car wash installations usewater at high pressure. This coulddamage certain parts of your vehicle.

Remove the aerial before using anautomatic car wash.

Switch the heater blower off toprevent contamination of the freshair filter.

We recommend that you wash yourvehicle with a sponge and lukewarmwater containing a car shampoo.

Cleaning the headlamps

CAUTIONSDo not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solventsor chemical solvents to clean them.

Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.

Cleaning the rearwindow

CAUTION

Do not scrape the inside of the rearwindowor use abrasives or chemicalsolvents to clean it.

Use a clean, lint free cloth or a dampchamois leather to clean the inside of therear window.

Cleaning the chrome trim

CAUTION

Do not use abrasives or chemicalsolvents. Use soapy water.

Body paintwork preservation

CAUTIONSDo not polish your vehicle in strongsunshine.

Do not allow polish to touch plasticsurfaces. It could be difficult toremove.

Donot apply polish to thewindscreenor rear window. This could cause thewipers to become noisy and they

may not clear the window properly.

We recommend that you wax thepaintwork once or twice a year.

CLEANINGTHE INTERIOR

Seat belts

WARNINGSDo not use abrasives, or chemicalsolvents to clean them.

Do not allow moisture to penetratethe seat belt retractor mechanism.

Clean the seat belts with interior cleaneror water applied with a soft sponge. Letthe seat belts dry naturally, away fromartificial heat.

221

Vehicle care

Page 224: Mondeo MK3 Book

Instrument cluster screens,LCD screens, radio screens

WARNING

Do not use abrasives, alcoholicsolvents or chemical solvents toclean them.

REPAIRINGMINORPAINTDAMAGE

CAUTION

Removeapparently harmless lookingsubstances from the paintworkimmediately (e.g. bird droppings, tree

resins, insect remains, tar spots, road saltand industrial fall out).

You should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choiceof products is available from your FordDealer. Read and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

222

Vehicle care

Page 225: Mondeo MK3 Book

USINGBOOSTERCABLES

CAUTIONSConnect batterieswith only the samenominal voltage.

Always use booster cables withinsulated clamps and adequate sizecable.

Do not disconnect the battery fromthe vehicle’s electrical system.

Toconnect thebooster cables

A

B

C D

E102925

Flat battery vehicleA

Booster battery vehicleB

Positive connection cableC

Negative connection cableD

1. Position the vehicles so that they donot touch one another.

2. Switch off the engine and anyelectrical equipment.

3. Connect the positive (+) terminal ofvehicleBwith the positive (+) terminalof vehicle A (cable C).

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal ofvehicleB to the ground connection ofvehicle A (cable D). See Batteryconnection points (page 224).

CAUTIONSDonotconnect to thenegative(–) terminal of the flat battery.

Make sure that the cables are clearof any moving parts.

To start the engine

1. Run the engine of vehicle B atmoderately high speed.

2. Start the engine of vehicle A.3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of

three minutes before disconnectingthe cables.

CAUTION

Do not switch on the headlampswhen disconnecting the cables. Thepeak voltage could blow the bulbs.

Disconnect the cables in the reverseorder.

223

Vehicle battery

Page 226: Mondeo MK3 Book

BATTERYCONNECTIONPOINTS

E114494

CAUTION

Donotconnect to thenegative(–) terminal of the flat battery.

224

Vehicle battery

Page 227: Mondeo MK3 Book

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONSUse only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage the vehicle and will make

the National Type Approval invalid.

If you change the diameter of thetyres from that fitted at the factory,the speedometer may not display

the correct speed. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to have the enginemanagement system reprogrammed.

A decal with tyre pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening at the B-pillar.

Check and set the tyre pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive the vehicle and whenthe tyres are cold.

CHANGINGAROADWHEEL

Lockingwheel nuts

You can obtain a replacement lockingwheel nut key and replacement lockingwheel nuts from your dealer using thereference number certificate.

Vehicleswith a temporarysparewheel

WARNINGSDo not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).

Drive the shortest possibledistances.

Do not fit more than one sparewheel on your vehicle at any onetime.

Do not use snowchains on this typeof wheel.

WARNINGSDo not carry out any tyre repairs ona temporary spare wheel.

CAUTION

The ground clearance of your vehiclewill be reduced. Take care whenparking next to a curb.

Note: Your vehicle may exhibit someunusual driving characteristics.

Vehicle jack

WARNINGSThe vehicle jack supplied with yourvehicle should only be used whenchanging a wheel in emergency

situations.

Before using the vehicle jack, checkthat it is not damaged or deformedand that the thread is lubricated and

free from foreign matter.

Never place anything between thejack and the ground, or the jack andthe vehicle.

Note: Vehicles with a tyre repair kit arenot equipped with a vehicle jack or awheel brace.

It is recommended to use a workshoptype hydraulic jack for changing betweensummer and winter tyres.

Note: Use a jack with a minimum liftingcapacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting platewith aminimumdiameter of 80millimetres(3.1 inches).

225

Wheels and tyres

Page 228: Mondeo MK3 Book

Vehicleswithout tyre repair kit

A

B

C

E86843

JackA

Wheel braceB

Space for lockingwheel nut keyC

Your vehicle jack and wheel brace arelocated in the spare wheel well.

Jacking and lifting points

CAUTION

Use only the specified jacking points.If you use other positions, you maydamage the body, steering,

suspension, engine, braking system orthe fuel lines.

E92658

A

B

Emergency use onlyA

MaintenanceB

226

Wheels and tyres

Page 229: Mondeo MK3 Book

E93184

A

Indentations in the sills A show thelocation of the jacking points.

E92932

E93020

Vehicleswith side skirts

E95345

Assembling thewheel brace

Type one

WARNING

When returning the wheel braceextension to its original position, takecare not to get your fingers caught.

Note:Make sure that the wheel brace isfully extended.

E122546

Extend the wheel brace.

Type two

CAUTION

The screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make sure

that the towing eye is fully tightened.

The screw-in towing eye is located in thespare wheel well.

227

Wheels and tyres

Page 230: Mondeo MK3 Book

E122502

Insert the screw-in towing eye into thewheel brace.

Removing thewheel trim

Type one

Insert the flat end of the wheel bracebetween the rim and the trim and carefullyremove the trim.

Type two

E122314

2

1

1. Insert the wheel trim remover.

2. Remove the wheel trim.

Note:Make sure that you pull the wheeltrim remover at right angles to the trim.

Removing a roadwheel

WARNINGSPark your vehicle in such a positionthat neither the traffic nor you arehindered or endangered.

Set up a warning triangle.

Make sure that the vehicle is on firm,level ground with the wheelspointing straight ahead.

Switch off the ignition and apply theparking brake.

If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, select first or reversegear. If it has an automatic

transmission, select park.

Have the passengers leave thevehicle.

Secure the diagonally oppositewheel with an appropriate block orwheel chock.

Make sure that the arrows ondirectional tyres point in the directionof rotation when the vehicle is

moving forwards. If you have to fit a sparewheel with the arrows pointing in theopposite direction, have the tyre refittedin the correct direction by a properlytrained technician.

Do notwork underneath the vehiclewhen it is supported only by a jack.

Make sure that the jack is vertical tothe jacking point and the base is flaton the ground.

CAUTION

Donot lay alloywheels face downonthe ground, this will damage thepaint.

228

Wheels and tyres

Page 231: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: The spare wheel is located underthe floor cover in the luggagecompartment.

E71948

1. Install the locking wheel nut key.

2. Slacken the wheel nuts.

3. Jack up the vehicle until the tyre isclear of the ground.

4. Remove the wheel nuts and thewheel.

Installing a roadwheel

WARNINGSUse only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage the vehicle and will make

the National Type Approval invalid. SeeTechnicalspecifications (page 235).

Do not fit run flat tyres on vehiclesthat were not originally fitted withthem. Please contact your dealer

for more details regarding compatibility.

CAUTION

Do not install alloy wheels usingwheel nuts designed for use withsteel wheels.

Note: Thewheel nuts of alloywheels andspoked steel wheels can also be used forthe steel spare wheel for a short time(maximum two weeks).

Note:Make sure the wheel and hubcontact surfaces are free from foreignmatter.

Note:Make sure that the cones on thewheel nuts are against the wheel.

1. Install the wheel.

2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. Install the locking wheel nut key.

1

2

3 4

5

E75442

4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in thesequence shown.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove thejack.

6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in thesequence shown. See Technicalspecifications (page 235).

7. Install the hub cap or cover using theball of your hand.

229

Wheels and tyres

Page 232: Mondeo MK3 Book

WARNING

Have the wheel nuts checked fortightness and the tyre pressurechecked as soon as possible.

TYREREPAIRKIT

Your vehicle may not have a spare tyre.In this case it will have an emergency tyrerepair kit that can be used to repair oneflat tyre.

The tyre repair kit is located in the sparewheel well.

General information

WARNINGSDepending on the type and extentof tyre damage, some tyres canonly be partially sealed or not sealed

at all. Loss of tyre pressure can affectvehicle handling, leading to loss of vehiclecontrol.

Do not use the tyre repair kit if thetyre has already been damaged asa result of being driven under

inflated.

Do not use the tyre repair kit on runflat tyres.

Do not try to seal damage otherthan that located within the visibletread of the tyre.

Do not try to seal damage to thetyre’s sidewall.

The tyre repair kit seals most tyrepunctures [with a diameter of up to sixmillimetres (1/4 inch)] to temporarilyrestore mobility.

Observe the following rules when usingthe kit:

• Drivewith caution and avoidmaking sudden steering ordrivingmanoeuvres, especially ifthe vehicle is heavily loaded or you aretowing a trailer.

• The kit will provide you with anemergency temporary repair, enablingyou to continue your journey to thenext vehicle or tyre dealer, or to drivea maximum distance of200 kilometres (125 miles).

• Do not exceed amaximumspeedof 80 km/h (50mph).

• Keep the kit out of the reach ofchildren.

• Only use the kit when the ambienttemperature is between –30°C (-22°F)and +70°C (+158°F).

Using the tyre repair kit

WARNINGSCompressed air can act as anexplosive or propellant.

Never leave the tyre repair kitunattended while in use.

CAUTION

Do not keep the compressoroperating for more than 10 minutes.

Note: Use the tyre repair kit only for thevehicle with which it was supplied.

• Park your vehicle at the roadside sothat you do not obstruct the flow oftraffic and so that you are able to usethe kit without being in danger.

• Apply the parking brake, even if youhave parked on a level road, to makesure that the vehicle will not move.

• Do not attempt to remove foreignobjects like nails or screwspenetratingthe tyre.

230

Wheels and tyres

Page 233: Mondeo MK3 Book

• Leave the engine running while the kitis in use, but not if the vehicle is in anenclosed or poorly ventilated area (forexample, inside a building). In thesecircumstances, switch thecompressor onwith the engine turnedoff.

• Replace the sealant bottle with a newone before the expiry date (see topof bottle) is reached.

• Inform all other users of the vehiclethat the tyre has been temporarilysealed with the tyre repair kit andmake them aware of the specialdriving conditions to be observed.

Inflating the tyre

WARNINGSCheck the sidewall of the tyre priorto inflation. If there are any cracks,bumps or similar damage, do not

attempt to inflate the tyre.

Do not stand directly beside the tyrewhile the compressor is pumping.

Watch the sidewall of the tyre. If anycracks, bumps or similar damageappear, turn off the compressor and

let the air out by means of the pressurerelief valveB. Do not continue drivingwiththis tyre.

The sealant contains natural rubberlatex. Avoid contact with skin andclothing. If this happens, rinse the

affected areas immediately with plenty ofwater and contact your doctor.

If the tyre inflation pressure does notreach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within sevenminutes, the tyremay have suffered

excessive damage, making a temporaryrepair impossible. In this case, do notcontinue driving with this tyre.

CAUTION

Screwing the bottle onto the bottleholder will pierce the seal of thebottle. Do not unscrew the bottle

from the holder as the sealant will escape.

E94973

BJ

I

FE

C

KA

G

H

D

Protective capA

Pressure relief valveB

HoseC

Orange capD

Bottle holderE

Pressure gaugeF

231

Wheels and tyres

Page 234: Mondeo MK3 Book

Power plug with cableG

Compressor switchH

LabelI

Bottle lidJ

Sealant bottleK

1. Open the lid of the tyre repair kit.

2. Peel off the label I showing themaximum permissible speed of80 km/h (50 mph) from the casingand attach it to the instrument panelin the driver’s field of view. Make surethe label does not obscure anythingimportant.

3. Take the hose C and the power plugwith cableG out of the kit.

4. Unscrew the orange cap D and thebottle lid J.

5. Screw the sealant bottle K clockwiseinto the bottle holder E fully tight.

6. Remove the valve cap from thedamaged tyre.

7. Detach the protective capA from thehose C and screw the hose C firmlyonto the valve of the damaged tyre.

8. Make sure that the compressor switchH is in position 0.

9. Insert the power plugG into the cigarlighter socket or auxiliary powersocket. SeeCigarlighter (page 126).See Auxiliary power sockets(page 127).

10. Start the engine.

11. Move the compressor switch H toposition 1.

12. Inflate the tyre for no longer thanseven minutes to an inflationpressure ofminimum 1.8 bar (26 psi)and a maximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi).Move the compressor switch H toposition0 and check the current tyrepressure with pressure gauge F.

13. Remove the power plugG from thecigar lighter socket or auxiliary powersocket.

14. Quickly unscrew the hose C fromthe tyre valve and replace theprotective cap A. Fasten the valvecap again.

15. Leave the sealant bottle K in thebottle holder E.

16. Make sure the kit, the bottle lid andthe orange cap are stored safely, butstill easily accessible in the vehicle.The kit will be required again whenyou check the tyre pressure.

17. Immediately drive approximatelythree kilometres (two miles) so thatthe sealant can seal the damagedarea.

Note:When pumping in the sealantthrough the tyre valve, the pressure mayrise up to 6 bar (87 psi) but will drop againafter about 30 seconds.

WARNING

If you experience heavy vibrations,unsteady steering behaviour ornoises while driving, reduce your

speed and drive with caution to a placewhere it is safe for you to stop the vehicle.Recheck the tyre and its pressure. If thetyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar (19 psi)or if there are any cracks, bumps or similardamage visible, do not continue drivingwith this tyre.

Checking the tyre pressure

1. Stop the vehicle after drivingapproximately three kilometres(two miles). Check, and wherenecessary, adjust the pressure of thedamaged tyre.

2. Attach the kit and read the tyrepressure from the pressure gauge F.

232

Wheels and tyres

Page 235: Mondeo MK3 Book

3. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tyreis 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it tothe specified pressure. SeeTechnical specifications (page235).

4. Follow the inflation procedure onceagain to top up the tyre.

5. Check the tyre pressure again fromthe pressure gauge F. If the tyrepressure is too high, deflate the tyreto the specified pressure using thepressure relief valve B.

6. Once you have inflated the tyre to itscorrect tyre pressure, move thecompressor switch H to position 0,remove the power plugG from thesocket, unscrew the hose C, fastenthe valve cap and replace theprotective cap A.

7. Leave the sealant bottleK in the bottleholder E and store the kit away safelyin its original location.

8. Drive to the nearest tyre specialist toget the damaged tyre replaced.Before the tyre is removed from therim, inform your tyre dealer that thetyre contains sealant. Renew the kitas soon as possible after it has beenused once.

Note: Remember that emergencyroadside tyre repair kits only providetemporary mobility. Regulationsconcerning tyre repair after usage of tyrerepair kit may differ from country tocountry. You should consult a tyrespecialist for advice.

WARNING

Before driving, make sure the tyreis adjusted to the recommendedinflation pressure. See Technical

specifications (page235). Monitor thetyre pressure until the sealed tyre isreplaced.

Empty sealant bottles can be disposedof togetherwith normal householdwaste.Return remains of sealant to your dealeror dispose of it in compliance with localwaste disposal regulations.

TYRECARE

E70415

To make sure the front and rear tyres ofyour vehicle wear evenly and last longer,we recommend that you swap the tyresfrom front to rear and vice versa at regularintervals of between 5 000 and 10 000km (3 000 and 6 000 miles).

CAUTION

Do not scrub the sidewalls of thetyres when you are parking.

If you have to mount a kerb, do so slowlyand approach it with the wheels atright-angles to the kerb.

Examine the tyres regularly for cuts,foreign objects and uneven wear of thetread. Uneven wear could mean that thewheel alignment is outside specification.

Check the tyre pressures (including thespare) when cold, every two weeks.

233

Wheels and tyres

Page 236: Mondeo MK3 Book

USINGWINTER TYRES

CAUTION

Make sure that you use the correctwheel nuts for the type of wheel thewinter tyres are fitted to.

If winter tyres are used, make sure thatthe tyre pressures are correct. SeeTechnicalspecifications (page 235).

USINGSNOWCHAINS

WARNINGSDo not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).

Do not use snow chains onsnow-free roads.

Only fit snow chains to specifiedtyres. See Technicalspecifications (page 235).

CAUTION

If your vehicle is fitted with wheeltrims, remove them before fittingsnow chains.

Note: The ABS will continue to operatenormally.

Only use small link snow chains.

Only use snowchains on the frontwheels.

Vehicleswith stability control(ESP)

Vehicles with stability control (ESP) mayexhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics which can be avoided byswitching the system off. See Usingstability control (page 151).

TYREPRESSUREMONITORINGSYSTEM

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to regularly checkthe tyre pressures.

The system will only provide a lowtyre pressure warning. It will notinflate the tyres.

The system may take longer todetect low pressure in the tyres ifyou have fitted snow chains.

Do not drive on significantlyunder-inflated tyres. Thismay causethe tyres to overheat and fail.

Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency,tyre tread life and may also affect yourability to drive the vehicle safely.

CAUTIONSDo not bend or damage the valveswhen you are inflating the tyres.

Have tyres installed by properlytrained technicians.

Note:After changing the tyres or sensorsthe system will take a few minutes toreset. During this period the system isoperational but a warning lamp mayappear.

The system monitors the pressure in thetyres using sensors located on thewheelsand a receiver located in your vehicle.When the system detects low pressurein the tyres, a warning message isdisplayed in the information display. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).

234

Wheels and tyres

Page 237: Mondeo MK3 Book

If a low pressure warning message isdisplayed in the information display, checkthe tyre pressures as soon as possibleand inflate them to the recommendedpressure. See Technicalspecifications (page 235). If thishappens frequently, have the causedetermined and rectified as soon aspossible.

Checking the tyre pressures

Note: If the tyre pressures are greaterthan or equal to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²), youwill see the + symbol below the pressurevalue. The system only measurespressure up to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²). The +symbol indicates that the tyre pressuresmay be higher.

Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have aslightly different menu structure. SelectSettings first to access Information.1. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. Highlight Information with the upand down buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with theup and down buttons and press theright arrow button.

4. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.

Setting the vehicle load

Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have aslightly different menu structure. SelectSettings first to access Setup.Correct tyre pressure settings depend onvehicle load. See Technicalspecifications (page 235). The systemcan only detect low pressure if you haveentered the current vehicle load.

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.

2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownbuttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with theup and down buttons and press theright arrow button.

4. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.

TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS

Wheel nut torque

Nm (Ib-ft)Wheel type

140 (103)All

235

Wheels and tyres

Page 238: Mondeo MK3 Book

Tyre pressures (cold tyres)

Up to 80 km/h (50mph)

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)T125/90 R 16All

3 (44)3 (44)3 (44)3 (44)215/55 R 16Spare wheel whenit differs from theother fitted wheels

Up to 160 km/h (100mph)

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)205/55 R 16*1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)215/55 R 16*

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)215/50 R 17 and235/45 R 18

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

236

Wheels and tyres

Page 239: Mondeo MK3 Book

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

3.0 (44)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)235/40 R 19

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)215/55 R 16*2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)

215/50 R 17,235/45 R 18and 235/40 R

19

2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)

*Only fit snow chains to specified tyres.

Continuous speed in excess of 160 km/h (100mph)

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)205/55 R 161.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)

3.0 (44)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)

215/55 R 16,215/50 R 17,235/45 R 18and 235/40 R

19

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4)and 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)

3.2 (46)2.9 (42)2.3 (33)2.5 (36)

215/55 R 16,215/50 R 17,235/45 R 18and 235/40 R

19

2.0L EcoBoostSCTi (MI4)

237

Wheels and tyres

Page 240: Mondeo MK3 Book

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

3.1 (45)2.9 (42)2.3 (33)2.5 (36)

215/55 R 16,215/50 R 17,235/45 R 18and 235/40 R

19

2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

238

Wheels and tyres

Page 241: Mondeo MK3 Book

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONPLATE

Note: The vehicle identification platedesign may vary to that shown.

Note: The information shown on thevehicle identification plate is dependantupon market requirements.

E85610C

B

E D

A

Vehicle identification numberA

Gross vehicle weightB

Gross train weightC

Maximum front axle weightD

Maximum rear axle weightE

The vehicle identification number andmaximum weights are shown on a platelocated on the lock side of the passengerdoor aperture at the bottom.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

E87496

The vehicle identification number isstamped into the floor panel on theright-hand side, beside the front seat. It isalso shown on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.

239

Vehicle identification

Page 242: Mondeo MK3 Book

TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle dimensions

DA

EB

C

E87089

4-door

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

4 850 (190.9)Maximum length - withoutbumper styling kit

A

4866 (191.6)Maximum length - withbumper styling kit

A

2 092 (82.4)Overall width includingexterior mirrors

B

240

Technical specifications

Page 243: Mondeo MK3 Book

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

1 460 - 1 500 (57.5 - 59.1)Overall height at EC kerbweight

C

2 850 (112.2)WheelbaseD

1 579 - 1 589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front trackE

1 595 - 1 605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear trackE

5-door

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

4 784 (188.3)Maximum length - withoutbumper styling kit

A

4800 (189)Maximum length - withbumper styling kit

A

2 092 (82.4)Overall width includingexterior mirrors

B

1 460 - 1 500 (57.5 - 59.1)Overall height at EC kerbweight

C

2 850 (112.2)WheelbaseD

1 579 - 1 589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front trackE

1 595 - 1 605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear trackE

Estate

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

4 837 (190.4)Maximum length - withoutbumper styling kit

A

4858 (191.3)Maximum length - withbumper styling kit

A

2 092 (82.4)Overall width includingexterior mirrors

B

1 472 - 1 512 (58 - 59.5)Overall height at EC kerbweight without roof bars

C

241

Technical specifications

Page 244: Mondeo MK3 Book

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

1 508 - 1 548 (59.4 - 61)Overall height at EC kerbweight including roof bars

C

2 850 (112.2)WheelbaseD

1 579 - 1 589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front trackE

1 595 - 1 605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear trackE

Towing equipment dimensions

C

A

FG

D

B

E

E87092

4-door

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

102 (4)Bumper – end of tow ballA

242

Technical specifications

Page 245: Mondeo MK3 Book

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

1 (0.04)Attachment point – centreof tow ball

B

1 150 (45.3)Wheel centre – centre oftow ball

C

438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – sidemember

D

876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE

434 (17.1)Centre of tow ball – centre1. attachment point

F

707 (27.8)Centre of tow ball – centre2. attachment point

G

5-door

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

100 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ballA

98 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ball(with sport bumper)

A

1 (0.04)Attachment point – centreof tow ball

B

1 080 (42.5)Wheel centre – centre oftow ball

C

438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – sidemember

D

876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE

364 (14.3)Centre of tow ball – centre1. attachment point

F

637 (25.1)Centre of tow ball – centre2. attachment point

G

243

Technical specifications

Page 246: Mondeo MK3 Book

Estate

Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem

100 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ball(without bumper styling kit)

A

95 (3.7)Bumper – end of tow ball(with bumper styling kit)

A

113 (4.4)Bumper – end of tow ball(without bumper styling kit,with self levelling suspen-

sion)

A

108 (4.3)Bumper – end of tow ball(with bumper styling kit,with self levelling suspen-

sion)

A

1 (0.04)Attachment point – centreof tow ball

B

1 135 - 1 140 (44.7 - 44.9)Wheel centre – centre oftow ball

C

438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – sidemember

D

876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE

419 - 429 (16.5 - 16.9)Centre of tow ball – centre1. attachment point

F

692 - 702 (27.2 - 27.6)Centre of tow ball – centre2. attachment point

G

244

Technical specifications

Page 247: Mondeo MK3 Book

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTION

Using the systemwith the engine offwill drain the battery.

This section describes the functions andfeatures of the Bluetooth mobile phonehands free system.

The Bluetooth mobile phone part of thesystemprovides interactionwith the audioor navigation system and your mobilephone. It allows you to use the audio ornavigation system to make and receivecalls without having to hold your mobilephone.

Compatibility of phones

CAUTION

As no common agreement exists,mobile phonemanufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in

their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insomecasesmay significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.

Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for fulldetails.

TELEPHONESETUP

Phonebook

After start up access to the phonebooklist can be delayed for several minutes,depending upon the size.

Phonebook categories

Depending on your phonebook entry,different categories can be displayed inthe audio unit.

For example:

MobileM

OfficeO

HomeH

FaxF

Note: Entries may be displayed withouta category attachment.

The category can also be indicated as anicon:

E87990

Phone

E87991

Mobile

E87992

Home

E87993

Office

E87994

Fax

Making a phone an activephone

When using the system for the first time,no phone is connected to the system.

Bluetooth phone

After bonding a Bluetooth phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.For further information refer to the phonemenu.

245

Telephone

Page 248: Mondeo MK3 Book

Select the phone from the active phonemenu.

Turning the ignition and radio or navigationunit back on again, the last active phoneis picked up by the system.

Note: In some cases the Bluetoothconnection must also be confirmed onthe phone.

BondanotherBluetoothphone

Bond a new Bluetooth phone asdescribed in the requirements for aBluetooth connection.

Phones stored in the system areaccessible by using the phone list on theaudio unit.

Note: Amaximumof six devicesmay bebonded. If six Bluetooth devices havealready been bonded, one of these hasto be debonded in order to bond a newdevice.

BLUETOOTHSETUP

Before you can use your telephone withyour vehicle it must be bonded to thevehicle telephone system.

Handling of phones

Up to six Bluetooth devices can bebonded to the vehicle system.

Note: If there is an ongoing call when thephone in use is selected as the newactivephone, the call is transferred to the vehicleaudio system.

Note: Even if connected to the carsystem, your phone can still be used inthe usual way.

Requirements for Bluetoothconnection

The following are required before aBluetooth phone connection can bemade.

1. The Bluetooth feature must beactivated on the phone and on theaudio unit. Make sure the Bluetoothmenu option in the audio unit is set toON. For information on phonesettings, refer to your phone userguide.

2. In the Bluetoothmenu on your phone,search for Ford Audio and select it.

3. Enter the code number shown on thevehicle display using the phonekeypad. If no code number is shownon the display, enter the Bluetooth PINnumber 0000 using the phonekeypad. Now enter the Bluetooth PINnumber shown on the vehicle display.

4. If your mobile phone asks you toauthorize the automatic connection,select YES.

Note: A phone call will be disconnectedif the audio unit is switched off. If theignition key is turned to the off positionthe phone call will remain in progress.

246

Telephone

Page 249: Mondeo MK3 Book

TELEPHONECONTROLS

Remote control

Voice, accept and reject button

E876622

1

Voice button1

Accept and reject button2

The VOICE button is used to activate orswitch off the Voice control.

On vehicles with an accept and rejectbutton, phone calls can be accepted andrejected by pressing the appropriatebutton.

Note: Some audio units have the acceptand reject buttons on the front bezel.These operate in the same way.

USINGTHE TELEPHONE -VEHICLESWITHOUT:NAVIGATIONSYSTEM

This chapter describes the phonefunctions of the audio unit.

Note: Refer to your audio guide fordetails of the controls.

An active phone must be present.

Even if connected to the audio unit, yourphone can still be used in the usual way.

Note: You can exit the phone menu bypressing any source buttonCD,AM/FMor AUX.

Making a call

Dialling a number using voicecontrol

Phonenumbers canbedialled using voicecontrol. See Telephone commands(page 262).

Diallinganumberusingtheaddressbook

You can access your phone addressbook via Bluetooth. The entrieswill appearin the unit display.

1. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton.

2. Press theMENU button.

3. Keep pressing theMENUbutton untilPHONEBOOK appears.

4. Press the seek buttons to select thedesired phone number.

Note: Press and hold the seek button toskip to the next letter in the alphabet.

5. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the selected phonenumber.

Diallinganumberusingtheaddressbook - Sony radio

You can access your phone addressbook via Bluetooth. The entrieswill appearin the unit display.

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the seek button until the phonebook is shown.

3. Press the up/down arrow buttons toselect the desired phone number.

Note:Press and hold the up/downarrowbuttons to skip to the next letter in thealphabet.

4. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the selected phonenumber.

247

Telephone

Page 250: Mondeo MK3 Book

Dialling a number using thetelephone keypad

If you have an audio unit with a telephonekeypad (buttons 0-9, * and #):

1. Press the call accept button. PressthePHONEbutton if you have a Sonyradio.

2. Dial the number using the telephonekeypad on the audio unit.

3. Press the call accept button.

Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilstentering a phone number, press the seekleft button to erase the last digit. A longpress will erase the complete string ofdigits.

Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit.

Ending a call

Calls can be ended by pressing the callreject button.

Audio units without a telephone keypadcan also end a call by pressing eitherPHONE, CD, AM/FM orON/OFF, orby pressing theMODE button on theremote control

Redialling a number

1. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton.

2. Press theMENU button.

3. Select the CALLOUT list or theCALL IN list. On some audio units,select theMISSED, INCOMING orOUTGOING calls list.

Note: If the active phone does notprovide a call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.

4. Press the seek button on the audiounit.

5. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the desired phonenumber.

Redialling a number - Sony radio

1. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton.

2. Press the seek button until the desiredlist is displayed.

Note: If the active phone does notprovide a call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.

3. Press the up/down buttons to selectthe desired phone number.

4. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the phone number.

Redialling the last dialled number -Sony radio

1. Press the call accept button.

2. Press the call accept button a secondtime to dial the number.

Receiving an incoming call

Accepting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be accepted bypressing either the call accept button, thePHONE button or theMODE button onthe remote control.

Rejecting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be rejected bypressing the call reject button.

Audio units without a telephone keypadcan also reject a call by pressing eitherPHONE, CD, AM/FM orON/OFF.

Receiving a second incomingcall

Note: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.

If there is an incoming call whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.

248

Telephone

Page 251: Mondeo MK3 Book

Accepting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing either the call accept button,thePHONEbutton, or theMODEbuttonon the remote control.

Rejecting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be rejected bypressing the call reject button. Unitswithout a telephone keypad can alsoreject a second incoming call by pressingthe CD button, or the AM/FM button.

Muting themicrophone

During a call, it is possible to mute themicrophone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.

Audio unitswith green call acceptbutton

Press the call accept button. Press thebutton once again to turn this function off.

Audio unitswithout green callaccept button

Press the seek up or down button. Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

Changing the active phone

Note: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.

Using the station storage button

Note: This process is only for audio unitswithout a telephone keypad.

1. Press the PHONE button on theaudio unit.

2. Press the preset number required(using the station preset buttons 1 -6).

Using the audio unitmenu

Note: After bonding a phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.

1. Press the PHONE or call acceptbutton.

2. Press theMENU button on the audiounit.

3. Select the ACTIVEPHONE optionon the audio unit.

4. Scroll through the different storedphones by using the seek buttons todisplay the bonded phones.

5. Press theMENU button to select thephonewhich is to be the active phone.

Debonding a bonded phone

Abondedphone canbedeleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.

1. Press the PHONE or call acceptbutton.

2. Press theMENU button on the audiounit.

3. Select the DEBOND option on theaudio unit.

4. Scroll through the different phones byusing the seek buttons anddisplay thephone to be debonded.

5. Press theMENU button to select thephone which is to be debonded.

Debonding a bonded phone -Sony radio

Abondedphone canbedeleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the up/downarrowbuttons untilyou reach the DEBOND option.

249

Telephone

Page 252: Mondeo MK3 Book

3. Scroll through the different phones byusing the seek buttons anddisplay thephone to be debonded.

4. Press the OK button to be debond.

USINGTHE TELEPHONE -VEHICLESWITH:NAVIGATIONSYSTEM

This chapter describes the phonefunctions of the Navigation System.

Note: Refer to your Navigation Systemguide for details of the controls.

An active phone must be present.

Even if connected to the NavigationSystem, your phone can still be used inthe usual way.

Making a call

Dialling a number

Phonenumbers canbedialled using voicecontrol. See Voice control (page 252).

Ending a call

Calls can be ended by pressing either theEND button, theMODE button on theremote switch or theON/OFF button onthe navigation system.

Redialling a number

1. Press thePHONE button on the unit.2. Select REDIAL.

Receiving an incoming call

Accepting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be accepted bypressing either the call accept button, theMODEbutton on the remote control, thePHONE button on the unit or by usingthe ACCEPT option in the menu.

Rejecting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be rejected bypressing either the call reject button, theCD orAM/FM buttons on the unit, or byusing the REJECT option in the menu.

Receiving a second incomingcall

Note: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.

If there is an incoming call, whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing either the call accept button,theMODEbutton on the remote control,the PHONE button on the unit or byusing the ACCEPT option in the menu.

Note: This will cancel the ongoing call.

Rejecting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be rejected bypressing either the call reject button, orone of the following buttons on the unit:CD, AM/FM.

Muting themicrophone

During a call, it is possible to mute themicrophone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.

SDnavigation units

Press the mute button (symbol of amicrophone with a line through it). Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

250

Telephone

Page 253: Mondeo MK3 Book

CDnavigation units

Press themicrophonemutebutton. Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

Changing the active phone

Note: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.

Note: After bonding a phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.

1. Press thePHONE button on the unit.2. Using the BTSETTINGS option in

the menu, select the active phonefrom the list.

Debonding a bonded phone

Abondedphone canbedeleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.

1. Press thePHONE button on the unit.2. Select the BTSETTINGS option in

the menu.

3. Select the DEBOND option in themenu.

4. Select the phone from the list.

251

Telephone

Page 254: Mondeo MK3 Book

PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION

CAUTION

Using the systemwith the engine offwill drain the battery.

Voice recognition enables operation ofthe systemwithout the need to divert yourattention from the road ahead in order tochange settings, or receive feedbackfrom the system.

Whenever you issue one of the definedcommands with the system active, thevoice recognition system converts yourcommand into a control signal for thesystem. Your inputs take the form ofdialogues or commands. You are guidedthrough these dialogues byannouncements or questions.

Please familiarise yourself with thefunctions of the systembefore using voicerecognition.

Supported commands

The voice control system allows you tocontrol the following vehicle functions:

• Bluetooth phone

• radio

• CD Player/CD Changer

• external device (USB)

• external device (iPod)

• automatic climate control

• navigation system - refer to separatenavigation handbook).

System response

As you work through a voice session thesystem will prompt you with a beep toneeach time the system is ready to proceed.

Do not try to give any commands until thebeep tone has been heard. The voicecontrol system will repeat each spokencommand back to you.

If you are not sure how to continue say"HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if youdo not wish to continue.

The "HELP" function provides only asubset of the available voice commands.Detailed explanations of all possible voicecommands can be found on the followingpages.

Voice commands

All voice commands should begivenusinga natural speaking voice, as if speaking toa passenger or on the phone. Your voicelevel should be dependant on thesurrounding noise level inside or outsidethe vehicle but do not shout.

USINGVOICECONTROL

Systemoperation

The order and content of the voicecontrols are given in the following lists. Thetables show the sequence of user voicecommands and system responses foreach available function.

<> indicates a number or stored name tagto be inserted by the user.

Short cuts

There are a number of voice commandshort cuts available, which allow you tocontrol some vehicle features withouthaving to follow the complete commandmenu. These are:

• phone: "MOBILE NAME", "DIALNUMBER", "DIAL NAME", and"REDIAL"

• CD player/CD changer: "DISC" and"TRACK"

252

Voice control

Page 255: Mondeo MK3 Book

• automatic climate control:"TEMPERATURE", "AUTO MODE","DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON" and"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"

• radio: "TUNE NAME"

• external device (USB): "TRACK"

• external device (iPod): "TRACK"

• SD card: "TRACK".

Start communicatingwith thesystem

Before you can start talking to the systemyou first have to press the VOICE orMODE button for each operation andwait until the systemanswerswith a beep.See (page 252).

Press the button again to cancel the voicesession.

Name tag

The name tag functionality can supportthe phone, audio and navigation featuresby using the "STORENAME" function. Youcan assign name tags to items such asfavourite radio stations and personalphone contacts. See Audio unitcommands (page253). SeeTelephonecommands (page 262). SeeNavigation systemcommands(page 267).

• Store up to 20name tags per function.

• The average recording time for eachname tag is approximately 2-3seconds.

AUDIOUNITCOMMANDS

CDPlayer

You can control playback directly by voicecontrol.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CDPLAYER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

253

Voice control

Page 256: Mondeo MK3 Book

"CDPLAYER"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

Track

You can choose a track on your CDdirectly.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

Shuffle all

To set random playback.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"SHUFFLE ALL"2

CDChanger

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

254

Voice control

Page 257: Mondeo MK3 Book

"CDCHANGER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"DISC"*

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE CD"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT CD"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

Disc

If you have aCDchanger you can choosethe disc number.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1

"DISC NUMBER PLEASE""DISC"*2

"DISC <number>""<a number between 1 and 6>"3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Track

You can choose a track on your CDdirectly.

255

Voice control

Page 258: Mondeo MK3 Book

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

Shuffle CD

To set random playback within the CDcontents.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1

"SHUFFLE CD"2

Radio

The radio voice commands support thefunctionality of the radio and allow you totune radio stations by voice control.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu.

"RADIO"

"HELP"

"AM"

"FM"

"TUNE NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

256

Voice control

Page 259: Mondeo MK3 Book

"RADIO"

"PLAY"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Tune frequency

This function allows you to tune your radioby voice commands.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE""AM"2

"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE""FM"

"TUNE <frequency>""<frequency>"*3

* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representativeexamples.

FMband: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1

• "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)

• "Ninety" (90.0)

• "One hundred point five" (100.5)

• "One zero one point one" (101.1)

• "One zero eight" (108.0)

AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in incrementsof 9

AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of1

• "Five thirty one" (531)

• "Nine hundred" (900)

• "Fourteen forty" (1440)

• "Fifteen zero three" (1503)

• "Ten eighty" (1080)

Store name

If you have tuned a radio station, you canstore it with a name in the directory.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED"

257

Voice control

Page 260: Mondeo MK3 Book

Tune name This function allows you to call up a storedradio station.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""TUNE NAME"*2

"TUNE <name>""<name>"3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Delete name

This function allows you to delete a storedradio station.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DELETED""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directory

This function allows you to let the systemtell you all of the stored radio stations.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY <DIRECTORY>""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directory

This function allows you to delete allstored radio stations at once.

258

Voice control

Page 261: Mondeo MK3 Book

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play

This function switches the audio sourceto the radio mode.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY"2

Auxiliary input

This function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached auxiliaryinput device.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"LINE IN""LINE IN"2

External devices - USB

These voice commands support thefunctionality of an external USB devicewhich may be connected to the audiounit.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"EXTERNALDEVICE", "USB"

"HELP"

259

Voice control

Page 262: Mondeo MK3 Book

"EXTERNALDEVICE", "USB"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT FOLDER"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.SeeGeneral information (page 270).

USBplay

This function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attachedUSBdevice.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"USB""USB"2

"PLAY"3

USBTrack

You can choose a track on your USBdevice directly.

260

Voice control

Page 263: Mondeo MK3 Book

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"USB""USB"2

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"3

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"*4

* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

External devices - iPod

These voice commands support thefunctionality of an iPod which may beconnected to the audio unit.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"EXTERNALDEVICE", "IPOD"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Playlists activated by voice controlmust be assigned special filenames. SeeGeneralinformation (page 270).

261

Voice control

Page 264: Mondeo MK3 Book

iPod Track You can choose a track off the all titles listof your iPod directly.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"IPOD""IPOD"2

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*3

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**4

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2","4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.

iPod playlist

You can choose a playlist from your iPoddirectly.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"IPOD""IPOD"2

"PLAYLIST NUMBER PLEASE""PLAYLIST"*3

"PLAYLIST <number>""<a number between 1 and 10>"4

* Playlists activated by voice controlmust be assigned special filenames. SeeGeneralinformation (page 270).

TELEPHONECOMMANDS

Phone

Your phone system allows you to createan additional phonebook. The storedentries can be dialled by voice control.Phone numbers stored by using voicecontrol are stored on the vehicle systemand not in your phone.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

262

Voice control

Page 265: Mondeo MK3 Book

"PHONE"

"HELP"

"MOBILE NAME"*

"DIAL NUMBER"*

"DIAL NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

"REDIAL"*

"ACCEPT CALLS"

"REJECT CALLS"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Phone functions

Dial number

Phone numbers can bedialled after givingthe name tag voice command.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NUMBER PLEASE""DIAL NUMBER"*2

"<phone number>"<phone number>"3CONTINUE?"

"DIALLING""DIAL"4

"<repeat last part of number>"CORRECTION"CONTINUE?"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

263

Voice control

Page 266: Mondeo MK3 Book

Dial name Phone numbers can bedialled after givingthe name tag voice command.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DIAL NAME"*2

"DIAL <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Redial

This function allows you to redial the lastdialled phone number.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REDIAL""REDIAL"*2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Mobile name

This function allows you to access phonenumbers stored with a name tag in yourmobile phone.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"MOBILE NAME" "<phonedependent dialogue>"

"MOBILE NAME"*2

* Can be used as a shortcut.

264

Voice control

Page 267: Mondeo MK3 Book

DTMF (Tone dialling)

This function transfers spoken numbersinto DTMF tones. For example, to makea remote enquiry to your homeansweringmachine or to enter a PIN number etc.

Note: DTMF can only be used during anongoing call. Press the VOICE button andwait for the system prompt.

Can only be used with vehicles installedwith a dedicated VOICE button.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"NUMBER PLEASE"1

"<numbers 1 to 9, zero, hash, star>"2

Create a phonebook

Store name

New entries can be stored with the"STORE NAME" command. This featurecan be used to dial a number by callingup the name instead of the full phonenumber.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED""NUMBER PLEASE"

"<phone number>""<phone number>"5

"STORING NUMBER""STORE"6"<phone number>""NUMBER STORED"

Delete name

Stored names can also be deleted fromthe directory.

265

Voice control

Page 268: Mondeo MK3 Book

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"<name> DELETED""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directory

Use this function to let the system tell youall stored entries.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"PLAY DIRECTORY""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directory

This function allows you to delete allentries in one go.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Main settings

Reject calls

Calls can be set to be automaticallyrejected using voice control.

266

Voice control

Page 269: Mondeo MK3 Book

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REJECT CALLS""REJECT CALLS"2

"ACCEPT CALLS""ACCEPT CALLS"*

* use this command to turn the reject mode off

NAVIGATIONSYSTEMCOMMANDS

Please refer to your separate Navigationhandbook for details of the commandmenus.

CLIMATECONTROLCOMMANDS

Climate

The climate voice commands supportsthe functionality of the fan speed,temperature and mode settings. Not allfunctions are available on all vehicles.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CLIMATE"

"HELP"

"FAN"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"*

"TEMPERATURE"*

"AUTO MODE"*

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the"FAN" shortcut is not available.

267

Voice control

Page 270: Mondeo MK3 Book

Fan This function allows you to adjust the fanspeed.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"FAN SPEED PLEASE""‘FAN"*2

"FAN MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3 "FAN <number>""<a number between 1 and 7>"

"FAN MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the"FAN" shortcut is not available.

Defrosting/Demisting

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"DEFROSTINGON/DEMISTINGON""DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING

ON"*2

"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTINGOFF"

"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF"*

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Temperature

This function allows you to adjust thetemperature.

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"TEMPERATURE PLEASE""TEMPERATURE"*2

"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3"TEMPERATURE <number>"

"<a number between 15 and 29 °Cwith 0.5 increments>" or "<a

number between 59 and 84 °F>"

268

Voice control

Page 271: Mondeo MK3 Book

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Automode

SystemanswerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"AUTO MODE""AUTO MODE"*2

* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperatureor fan speed.

269

Voice control

Page 272: Mondeo MK3 Book

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONSTake care when handling externaldevices with exposed electricalconnectors (such as the USB plug).

Always replace the protective cap/shieldwhen possible. There may be a risk ofelectrostatic discharge causing damageto the device.

Do not touch or handle the USBsocket in the vehicle. Cover thesocket when not in use.

Only use USB Mass-Storage devicecompliant devices.

Always switch your audio unit to adifferent source (for example theradio) before unplugging the USB

device.

Do not install or connect USB hubsor splitters.

Note: The system is only designed torecognize and read suitable audio filesfrom a USB device that conforms to theUSB Mass-Storage device class or aniPod. Not all available USBdevices can beguaranteed to function with the system.

Note: It is possible to connect compatibledevices with a trailing USB lead as well asthose that plug into the vehicle USBsocket directly (for exampleUSBmemorysticks and pen drives).

Note: Some USB devices with a higherpower consumption may not becompatible (for example some larger harddrives).

Note: Access time to read the files onthe external device will vary dependingupon factors such as the file structure,size and device content.

The system supports a range of externaldevices, to fully integrate with your audiounit via the USB and auxiliary inputsockets. Once connected, control of theexternal device is possible via the audiounit.

A list of typical compatible devices areshown below:• USB memory sticks

• USB portable hard drives

• Some MP3 players with USBconnection

• iPod media players (refer towww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for latestcompatibility list).

The system is USB 2.0 full speedcompatible, USB 1.1 host compliant andsupports FAT 16/32 file systems.

Information on audio filestructuresforexternaldevices

USB

Create only a single partition on the USBdevice.

If playlists are created, they must containcorrect file paths referenced to the USBdevice. It is recommended to create theplaylist after the audio files have beentransferred to the USB device.

Playlists must be created in .m3u format.

Audio files must be in .mp3 format.

Do not exceed the following limits:• 1000 items per folder (files, folders and

playlists)• 5000 folders per USB device

(including playlists)• 8 subfolder levels.

270

Connectivity

Page 273: Mondeo MK3 Book

To enable voice control for customplaylists and folders, follow the procedurebelow:• Create folders named with the

structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford3"without an extension.

• Create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>.m3u"where <*>is a number 1-10. For example"Ford5.m3u" without any spacebetween "Ford" and the number.

Thereafter, custom folders and playlistswill be selectable with voice control. SeeAudio unit commands (page 253).

iPod

To enable voice control for customplaylists, create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>"where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford7"without any space between "Ford" andthe number.

Thereafter, playlists will be selectable withvoice control. See Audio unitcommands (page 253).

CONNECTINGANEXTERNALDEVICE

WARNING

Make sure the external device issecurelymountedwithin the vehicle,and that trailing connections do not

obstruct any of the driving controls.

External devicesmaybe connected usingthe auxiliary input socket and the USBport. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket (page 131). SeeUSBport (page131).

Connection

Plug in the device, and if necessarysecure it to preventmovement within thevehicle.

Connecting an iPod

For optimum convenience and audioquality,we recommend that youpurchasea dedicated single connection leadavailable from your dealer.

Alternatively, it is possible to connect youriPod using the standard iPod USB cableand a separate 3.5mm audio jack lead. Ifusing thismethod preset the iPod volumeto maximum and turn off any equalizersettings before making the connections:

• Connect the headphoneoutput of theiPod to the AUX IN socket.

• Connect the USB cable from the iPodto the vehicle USB socket.

CONNECTINGANEXTERNALDEVICE - VEHICLESWITH:BLUETOOTH

Connecting aBluetooth audiodevice

CAUTION

As various standards exist,manufacturers are able to implementa variety of profiles in their Bluetooth

devices. Because of this, anincompatibility can occur between theBluetooth device and the system, whichin some cases may limit systemfunctionality. To avoid this situation, onlyrecommended devices should be used.

Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.comfor full details.

271

Connectivity

Page 274: Mondeo MK3 Book

Bonding the device

Note: Some audio and navigation unitshave a separate Bluetooth audio menu.Use this to access setup and control.

To connect the device to the systemfollow the same procedure as forBluetooth hands free phones. SeeBluetooth setup (page 246).

Operating the device

Select Bluetooth audio as the activesource.

Tracks can be accessed by skippingforwards and backwards using thesteering wheel controls, or directly fromthe audio unit controls.

USINGAUSBDEVICE

Various icons are used to identify typesof audio file, folders etc.

E100029

USB device is the active source

E100022

Folder

E100023

Playlist

E100024

Album

E100025

Artist

E100026

Filename

E100027

Track title

E100028

Information not available

Sony radio

Operation

Select the USB device as the audiosource by repeatedly pressing theCD/AUX button until USB appears in thedisplay. After first connecting the USBdevice, the first track within the first folderwill start to play automatically.Subsequently, following audio sourceswitching, the position of playback on theUSB device is remembered.

To browse the device contents, press theup/down arrow key or the OK buttononce.

The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the folder view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).

• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.

• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.

To navigate theUSBdevice contents, usethe up/down arrow keys to scroll throughlists, and the left/right keys to move up ordown within the folder hierarchy. Onceyour desired track, playlist or folder ishighlighted, press theOKbutton to selectplayback.

272

Connectivity

Page 275: Mondeo MK3 Book

Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the USB device contents, press andhold the left arrow key.

Audio control

Press the left and right arrow keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.

Press and hold the left/right arrow keysto enable fast rewind/fast forward throughtrack content.

Press the up/down arrow key or the OKbutton to browse the device contents.

Press the MENU key to enter the USBmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here with respect tofolders and playlists.

Press the SCANbutton to scan thewholedevice, current folder or a playlist if it is inoperation.

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename

• title

• artist

• album

• track number and playing time.

Repeated button presses will scrollthrough these displays.

CDNavigation units

Operation

Select the USB device as the audiosource by pressing the CD/AUX buttonuntil DEVICES appears in the display.Select DEVICESand then select USB fromthe available device list. After firstconnecting theUSBdevice, the first trackwithin the first folder will start to playautomatically. Subsequently, followingaudio source switching, the position ofplayback on the USB device isremembered.

To browse the device contents, press theSELECT button once.

The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the folder view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).

• "<" to the left hand side of the displayindicates that a further level up isreadable.

• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.

To navigate theUSBdevice contents, usethe rotary scroll/select button to browsethrough lists. Push the button to expandthe contentswithin the highlighted playlistor folder, or to commence playback of aparticular track. Press ESC to go up onelevel.

Audio control

Press the SEEK up and down keys toskip backwards and forwards throughtracks.

Press and hold theSEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.

Rotate or press the SELECT button tobrowse the device contents.

Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons toenable shuffle and repeat functions withrespect to folders and playlists. Differentoptions may appear depending uponwhether or not a playlist is in operation.

273

Connectivity

Page 276: Mondeo MK3 Book

Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrent playlist if it is in operation, or thecomplete USB device or folder.

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename

• title

• artist

• album

• track number and playing time.

SDNavigation units

Operation

Select the USB device as the audiosource by pressing the CD/AUX buttonuntil the USB button appears to the left ofthe display. Select USB from the availabledevice list.

Note: Some devices may be shown butnot selectable, depending if the device isconnected or not.

After first connecting the USB device, thefirst track within the first folder will start toplay automatically. Subsequently, followingaudio source switching, the position ofplayback on the USB device isremembered.

To browse the device contents, press thescroll up or down arrow button.

The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the folder view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).

• "<" to the left hand side of the displayindicates that a further level up isreadable.

• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.

To navigate theUSBdevice contents, usethe scroll buttons to browse through lists.Push the button to expand the contentswithin the highlighted playlist or folder, orto commence playback of a particulartrack. Press the left arrow key to go upone level.

Audio control

Press the SEEK up and down keys toskip backwards and forwards throughtracks.

Press and hold theSEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.

Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browsethe device contents.

Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons toenable shuffle and repeat functions withrespect to folders and playlists.

Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrent playlist if it is in operation, or thecomplete USB device or folder.

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename

• title

• artist

• album

• track number and playing time.

USINGAN IPOD

Various icons are used to identify typesof audio file, folders etc.

274

Connectivity

Page 277: Mondeo MK3 Book

E100030

iPod is the active source

E100031

iPod playlist

E100032

iPod artist

E100033

iPod album

E100034

iPod genre

E100035

iPod song

E100036

iPod generic category

E100037

iPod generic media file

Sony radio

Operation

Connect the iPod. SeeConnectinganexternal device (page 271).

Select the iPod as the audio source byrepeatedly pressing theCD/AUX buttonuntil iPod appears in the display.

The iPodmenu list for browsing contentswill be available through the radio display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standaloneuse (for example search by artist, title,etc.). To browse the iPod contents, pressthe up/down arrow key or the OK buttononce.

The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the list view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).

• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.

• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use theup/downarrowkeys to scroll through lists,and the left/right keys to move up ordown within the hierarchy. Once yourdesired track, playlist, album, artist orgenre is highlighted, press the OK buttonto select playback.

Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the iPod contents, press and hold theleft arrow key.

Audio control

Press the left and right arrow keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.

Press and hold the left/right arrow keysto enable fast rewind/fast forward throughtrack content.

Press the up/down arrow key or the OKbutton to browse the iPod contents.

Press theMENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possibleto enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.

Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.

275

Connectivity

Page 278: Mondeo MK3 Book

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title

• artist

• track number and playing time.

Repeated button presses will scrollthrough these displays.

CDNavigation units

Operation

Connect the iPod. SeeConnectinganexternal device (page 271).

Select the iPod as the audio source bypressing the CD/AUX button untilDEVICES appears in the display. SelectDEVICES and then select iPod from theavailable device list.

The iPodmenu list for browsing contentswill be available through the display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standaloneuse (for example search by artist, title,etc.). To browse the iPod contents, pressthe SELECT button once.

The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the list view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).

• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.

• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use therotary scroll/select button to browsethrough lists. Push the button to expandthe contentswithin the highlighted playlist,album, artist, genre or to commenceplayback of a particular track. Press ESCto go up one level.

Audio control

Press the SEEK up and down keys toskip backwards and forwards throughtracks.

Press and hold theSEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.

Rotate or press the SELECT button tobrowse the iPod contents.

Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possibleto enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.

Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title

• artist

• track number and playing time.

SDNavigation units

Operation

Connect the iPod. SeeConnectinganexternal device (page 271).

Select the iPod as the audio source bypressing the CD/AUX button until theiPod button appears to the left of thedisplay. Select iPod from the availabledevice list.

Note: Some devices may be shown butnot selectable, depending if the device isconnected or not.

276

Connectivity

Page 279: Mondeo MK3 Book

The iPodmenu list for browsing contentswill be available through the display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standaloneuse (for example search by artist, title,etc.). To browse the iPod contents, pressthe scroll up or down arrow button.

The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the list view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).

• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.

• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use thescroll buttons to browse through lists.Push the button to expand the contentswithin the highlighted playlist, album, artist,genre or to commence playback of aparticular track. Press the left arrow keyto go up one level.

Audio control

Press the SEEK up and down keys toskip backwards and forwards throughtracks.

Press and hold theSEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.

Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browsethe iPod contents.

Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possibleto enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.

Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title

• artist

• track number and playing time.

277

Connectivity

Page 280: Mondeo MK3 Book

ROADSAFETY

WARNINGSThe system provides you withinformation designed to help youreach your destination quickly and

safely.

For reasons of safety, the drivershould only program the systemwhen the vehicle is stationary.

The system provides no assistancewith respect to stop signs, trafficlights, areas under construction or

other important safety information.

Do not use the system until youhave familiarised yourself with itsoperation.

Only view the system display whendriving conditions permit.

Safety information

Read and follow all stated safetyprecautions. Failure to do somay increaseyour risk of collision and personal injury.Ford Motor Company shall not be liablefor any damages of any type arising fromfailure to follow these guidelines.

If detailed viewing of route instructions isnecessary, pull off the roadwhen it is safeto do so and park your vehicle.

Do not use the navigation system tolocate emergency services.

To use the system as effectively andsafely as possible, always use the latestnavigation information. Your dealer will beable to assist with this.

278

Navigation introduction

Page 281: Mondeo MK3 Book

GETTINGSTARTED

CAUTION

Using the systemwith the engine offwill drain the battery.

Note: Youwill be chargedwhen sendingand receiving text messages.

Note:Refer to your phone handbook forall phone functions and operation.

Note: Keep the activation code (printedon the installation guide) in a safe place.

Note:Retain the activation textmessagein your mobile phone inbox.

Compatibility of phones

CAUTION

As no common agreement exists,mobile phonemanufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in

their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insomecasesmay significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.

Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com forfull details.

Installing themicro SDcard

1

2

E114212

1. Remove the micro SD card from theadaptor.

2. Insert the micro SD card into themobile phone.

Activating themobile phonenavigation system

Note: The radio must be switched onbefore connecting the mobile phone tothe in-car GPS receiver.

Note: The Ford Mobile Navigation mustbe installed and activated on your mobilephone.

Note: It is possible to activate up to amaximum of three phones.

Note: Detailed instructions are availableon the micro SD card and atwww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com.

To connect the device to the systemfollow the same procedure as forBluetooth hands free phones. SeeBluetooth setup (page 246).

1. Switch the radio on.

279

Navigation system

Page 282: Mondeo MK3 Book

E114213

2. Switch yourmobile phoneon and startthe "Ford Mobile Navigation".

3. Choose "Select Destination".

4. Choose "Enter Address".

5. Change route options if necessaryand start the route guidance.

6. The vehicle display will show the turninformation. Voice instructions areheard via the vehicle speakers.

Note:Yourmobile phonewill display yourcurrent position.

7. You are able to exit the application andcontinue your route guidance afterrestarting the application.

280

Navigation system

Page 283: Mondeo MK3 Book

TYPEAPPROVALS

FCC/INDUSTRYCANADANOTICE

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

FCC ID: WJLRX-42

IC: 7847A-RX42

Changes or modifications to your devicenot expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

RX-42 - declaration ofconformity

We, the party responsible for compliance,declare under our sole responsibility thatthe Handset Integration product RX-42 isin conformity with the provisions of thefollowing Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. Acopy of theDeclaration of Conformity canbe found at:

www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformity

The Bluetooth word mark and logos areowned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Ford MotorCompany is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names are thoseof their respective owners.

TYPEAPPROVALS

E114214

© 2008 NAVTEQ B.V. All rights reserved.

281

Appendices

Page 284: Mondeo MK3 Book

E114220

ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY

WARNINGSYour vehicle has been tested andcertified to legislations relating toelectromagnetic compatibility

(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 orother applicable local requirements). It isyour responsibility to ensure that anyequipment you have fitted complies withapplicable local legislations. Have anyequipment fitted by properly trainedtechnicians.

WARNINGS

Radio frequency (RF) transmitterequipment (e.g. cellular telephones,amateur radio transmitters etc.)may

only be fitted to your vehicle if they complywith the parameters shown in the tablebelow. There are no special provisions orconditions for installations or use.

Do not mount any transceiver,microphones, speakers, or anyother item in the deployment path

of the airbag system.

Do not fasten antenna cables tooriginal vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.

282

Appendices

Page 285: Mondeo MK3 Book

WARNINGSKeep antenna and power cables atleast 100mm from any electronic

WARNINGSmodules and airbags.

E85998

1 2 3 4

AntennaPositionsMaximumoutput powerWatt(PeakRMS)

FrequencyBandMHz

3, 450 W1 – 30

1, 2, 350 W30 – 54

1, 2, 350 W68 – 87.5

1, 2, 350 W142 – 176

1, 2, 350 W380 – 512

1, 2, 310 W806 – 940

1, 2, 310 W1200 – 1400

1, 2, 310 W1710 – 1885

1, 2, 310 W1885 – 2025

Note: After the installation of RFtransmitters, check for disturbances fromand to all electrical equipment in thevehicle, both in the standby and transmitmodes.

Check all electrical equipment:• with the ignitionON• with the engine running

• during a road test at various speeds.

283

Appendices

Page 286: Mondeo MK3 Book

Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside the vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable humanexposure requirements.

284

Appendices

Page 287: Mondeo MK3 Book

AA/CSee: Climate control...................................106

About this handbook................................7ABSSee: Brakes.................................................150

ABS driving hintsSee: Hints on driving with ABS.................150

ACCSee: Adaptive cruise control (ACC).........164

AccessoriesSee: Parts and accessories..........................7See: Using ACC..........................................165

Active suspension.................................156Principle of operation.................................156

Active suspensionSee: Using active suspension...................156

Adaptive cruise control (ACC).............164Principle of operation.................................164

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)See: Using ACC..........................................165

Adaptive front lighting system(AFS).......................................................59Cornering lamps...........................................60

Adjusting the headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps............................................57

Adjusting the steering wheel.................48AFSSee: Adaptive front lighting system(AFS)...........................................................59

Air conditioningSee: Climate control...................................106

Air vents..................................................106Front air vents.............................................106Rear air vents..............................................106

Alarm.........................................................45Principle of operation...................................45

Appendices............................................281Arming the alarm.....................................47Arming the engine immobiliser.............44Ashtray....................................................127Front ashtray................................................127Rear ashtray................................................127

Audible warnings and indicators..........82Switching the chimes on and off...............82

Audio control...........................................48Mode..............................................................48Seek...............................................................49

Audio unit commands.........................253Auxiliary input..............................................259CD Changer................................................254CD Player....................................................253External devices - iPod..............................261External devices - USB.............................259Radio............................................................256

Auto-dimming mirror..............................75Autolamps................................................55Automatic climate control....................109Air distribution...............................................111Blower...........................................................110Mono mode.................................................110Recirculated air.............................................111Setting the temperature.............................110Switching off the automatic climatecontrol........................................................111

Switching the air conditioning on andoff................................................................111

To switch mono mode back on................110To switch mono mode off..........................110Windscreen defrosting anddemisting...................................................111

Automatic main beam control..............55Activating the system..................................56Manually overriding the system.................56Setting the system sensitivity.....................56

Automatic transmission........................147Drive modes................................................148Emergency park position releaselever..........................................................148

Hints on driving with an automatictransmission............................................148

Selector lever positions..............................147Autowipers...............................................50

285

Index

Page 288: Mondeo MK3 Book

Auxiliary heater.......................................112Changing the remote controlbattery.......................................................115

Diesel auxiliary heater (depending oncountry).....................................................116

Feedback during starting and switchingoff...............................................................115

Fuel operated heater (depending oncountry).....................................................116

Parking heater..............................................112Programming the transmitter....................115Remote start in combination with directstart or timer.............................................115

Remote starting...........................................114Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket.............131Auxiliary power sockets........................127

BBattery connection points...................224Blind spot monitor...................................75Blind spot information system (BLIS)........75Detection errors............................................77System detection and alerts......................76Turning the system on and off...................76Using the system..........................................75

Bluetooth setup....................................246Handling of phones...................................246Requirements for Bluetoothconnection..............................................246

Bonnet lockSee: Opening and closing the bonnet....206

Booster cablesSee: Using booster cables.......................223

Booster cushions....................................23Booster cushion (Group 3).........................24Booster seat (Group 2)...............................23

Brake and clutch fluid check................217Brakes.....................................................150Principle of operation.................................150

Bulb changingSee: Changing a bulb..................................63

Bulb specification chart..........................69

CCargo nets..............................................180Luggage retention net...............................180

Car washSee: Cleaning the exterior.........................221

Catalytic converter.................................141Driving with a catalytic converter..............141

CD changer............................................130Changing a bulb......................................63Approach lamp.............................................65Central high mounted brake lamp.............67Daytime running lamps...............................64Front fog lamps............................................66Headlamp......................................................63Interior lamps.................................................67Luggage compartment lamp.....................69Number plate lamp......................................67Reading lamps..............................................68Rear lamps....................................................66Side repeater................................................65Vanity mirror lamp........................................69

Changing a fuse....................................192Changing a road wheel.......................225Assembling the wheel brace...................227Installing a road wheel...............................229Jacking and lifting points..........................226Locking wheel nuts...................................225Removing a road wheel............................228Removing the wheel trim.........................228Vehicle jack.................................................225Vehicles with a temporary sparewheel.......................................................225

Changing the remote controlbattery....................................................34Remote control with a folding keyblade..........................................................34

Remote control without a folding keyblade..........................................................35

Changing the wiper blades...................52Rear window wiper blades.........................53Windscreen wiper blades...........................52

Checking the wiper blades...................52Child safety..............................................22Child safety locks....................................27Electric child safety locks............................28Manual child safety locks............................27

Child seat positioning.............................24Child seats................................................22Child restraints for different massgroups........................................................22

Cigar lighter............................................126

286

Index

Page 289: Mondeo MK3 Book

Cleaning the exterior............................221Body paintwork preservation...................221Cleaning the chrome trim.........................221Cleaning the headlamps...........................221Cleaning the rear window.........................221

Cleaning the interior..............................221Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens,radio screens.........................................222

Seat belts.....................................................221Climate control.......................................106Principle of operation.................................106

Climate control commands................267Climate.........................................................267

Clock.......................................................126Coded keys.............................................44Cold weather precautions...................189Connecting an external device...........271Connection..................................................271

Connecting an external device -Vehicles With: Bluetooth....................271Connecting a Bluetooth audiodevice.......................................................271

Connectivity...........................................270General information...................................270

Convenience features..........................126Coolant checkSee: Engine coolant check.......................216

Cruise control.........................................162Principle of operation.................................162

Cruise controlSee: Using cruise control..........................162

Cup holders............................................128

DDaytime running lamps (DRL)...............55Detachable tow ball..............................185Driving with a trailer.....................................187Driving without a trailer...............................188Inserting the tow ball arm..........................186Maintenance...............................................188Removing the tow ball arm.......................187Unlocking the tow ball armmechanism..............................................186

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)................137Regeneration...............................................137

Direction indicators.................................60

Disabling the passenger airbag............32Disabling the passenger airbag.................33Enabling the passenger airbag..................33Fitting the passenger airbag deactivationswitch.........................................................33

Disarming the alarm................................47Vehicles with keyless entry.........................47Vehicles without keyless entry...................47

Disarming the engine immobiliser........44Dog guard...............................................181Installing behind the front seats................181Installing behind the rear seats.................182

DPFSee: Diesel particulate filter (DPF)............137

Driver alert...............................................172Principle of operation.................................172

Driving hints............................................189Driving through water...........................189Driving through water ...............................189

EEco mode...............................................139Principle of operation.................................139

Electric exterior mirrors..........................73Electric folding mirrors.................................74Mirror tilting positions...................................73Reverse mirror dipping................................74

Electric seats...........................................1212-way electric seat......................................1218-way electric seat.....................................122

Electric sunroof.......................................117Opening and closing the sunroof..............117Opening and closing the sunroofautomatically............................................118

Sunroof anti-trap protection......................118Sunroof relearning.......................................119Sunroof safety mode..................................119Tilting the sunroof........................................118

287

Index

Page 290: Mondeo MK3 Book

Electric windows......................................71Anti-trap function..........................................72Driver’s door switches..................................71Front and rear passengers’ doorswitches.....................................................71

Global opening and global closing.............71Opening and closing the windowsautomatically..............................................71

Resetting the memory of the electricwindows....................................................72

Safety mode..................................................73Safety switch for rear windows..................72

Electromagnetic compatibility............282Emergency equipment........................190Engine compartment overview - 1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma).............207

Engine compartment overview - 1.6LEcoBoost SCTi (Sigma).....................208

Engine compartment overview - 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4)...............................209

Engine compartment overview - 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel...............212

Engine compartment overview - 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi (MI4)..........................210

Engine compartment overview - 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel...............214

Engine compartment overview - 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)................................211

Engine coolant check...........................216Checking the coolant level........................216Topping up...................................................217

Engine heater.........................................137Engine immobiliser..................................44Principle of operation...................................44

Engine oil check.....................................216Checking the oil level.................................216Topping up...................................................216

Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)....................................215

Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma).................................................215

Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)............215

Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi(DW)Diesel/2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel....................................................216

Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4)......................................................215

Exterior mirrors........................................73Manual folding mirrors.................................73

FFastening the seat belts.........................31First aid kit...............................................190Floor mats...............................................131Fog lampSee: Front fog lamps....................................57

Forward alert function..........................168Adjusting the warning sensitivity..............169Switching forward alert on and off...........169

Front fog lamps.......................................57Fuel and refuelling.................................140Technical specifications.............................142

Fuel burning heaterSee: Auxiliary heater....................................112

Fuel consumption..................................142Fuel consumptionSee: Technical specifications....................142

Fuel filler flap............................................141Fuel quality - Diesel...............................140Long-term storage......................................141

Fuel quality - E85...................................140Long-term storage.....................................140

Fuel quality - Petrol................................140Fuse box locations.................................191Central fuse box..........................................191Engine compartment fuse box.................191Rear fuse box - 4-door and 5-door.........191Rear fuse box - Estate...............................192

Fuses........................................................191Fuse specification chart.......................193Central fuse box..........................................197Engine compartment fuse box................193Rear fuse box..............................................199

GGauges.....................................................78Engine coolant temperature gauge..........79Fuel gauge.....................................................80

GearboxSee: Transmission.......................................147

General driving points - Vehicles With:Sports Suspension.............................189

288

Index

Page 291: Mondeo MK3 Book

General information on radiofrequencies............................................34

Getting started......................................279Activating the mobile phone navigationsystem.....................................................279

Compatibility of phones............................279Installing the micro SD card......................279

Glasses holder.......................................130Global opening and closing...................39Global closing................................................40Global opening.............................................40

Glove box...............................................128Cooled glove box.......................................128

HHandbrakeSee: Parking brake.....................................150

Hazard warning flashers........................58Headlamp adjustmentSee: Adjusting the headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps................................................57

Headlamp levelling..................................57Recommended headlamp levelling switchpositions....................................................58

Headlamp washers................................52Head restraints......................................123Adjusting the head restraint......................123Removing the head restraint....................123

Heated seats..........................................124Raising and lowering the temperatureautomatically...........................................124

Raising and lowering the temperaturemanually...................................................125

Heated windows and mirrors...............112Heated exterior mirrors..............................112Heated windows.........................................112

HeatingSee: Climate control...................................106

Hill launch assist (HLA)See: Using hill start assist..........................153

Hill start assist.........................................153Principle of operation.................................153

Hints on driving with ABS.....................150HLASee: Hill start assist.....................................153See: Using hill start assist..........................153

IIgnition switch........................................132ImmobiliserSee: Engine immobiliser..............................44

Information displays................................84General information.....................................84

Information messages...........................97Active suspension........................................98Airbag.............................................................98Alarm..............................................................98Automatic main beam control/Lanedeparture warning/Driver alert..............98

Battery and charging system.....................99Blind spot monitor........................................99Child power lock.........................................100Climate control............................................100Cruise control andAdaptive cruise control(ACC)........................................................100

Doors open..................................................100Engine immobiliser......................................101Hill start assist...............................................101Keyless system............................................101Lighting.........................................................102Maintenance...............................................102Message indicator........................................97Message symbols........................................97Occupant protection..................................103Parking brake..............................................103Power steering............................................103Stability control (ESP).................................104Transmission................................................104Tyre pressure monitoring system............104Viewing current messages.........................97Voice control................................................105

Instrument lighting dimmer..................126Instruments..............................................78Interior lamps............................................61Courtesy lamp...............................................61LED interior lighting.......................................61Reading lamps...............................................61Vanity mirror lamps......................................62

Introduction................................................7iPod connectionSee: Connecting an external device.......271See: Connecting an external device -Vehicles With: Bluetooth........................271

289

Index

Page 292: Mondeo MK3 Book

iPodSee: Using an iPod.....................................274

ISOFIX anchor points..............................26Attaching a child seat with toptethers........................................................26

Top tether anchor points............................26

JJump startingSee: Using booster cables.......................223

KKeyless entry............................................41Disabled keys................................................43General information......................................41Locking and unlocking the doors with thekey blade...................................................43

Locking the vehicle.......................................41Passive key....................................................41Unlocking the vehicle...................................42

Keyless starting.....................................132Failure to start..............................................133Ignition on.....................................................132Starting a diesel engine.............................133Starting with automatic transmission......133Starting with manual transmission...........133Stopping the engine when the vehicle ismoving.....................................................134

Stopping the engine with the vehiclestationary.................................................134

Keys and remote controls.....................34

LLane departure warning.......................174Principle of operation.................................174

Lighting control........................................54Headlamp flasher.........................................54Home safe lighting.......................................55Lighting control positions............................54Main and dipped beam...............................54Parking lamps...............................................54

Lighting.....................................................54Load carriersSee: Roof racks and load carriers............181

Load carrying.........................................176General information....................................176

Load retaining fixtures..........................183Installing the load bracket.........................183Installing the load retaining fixtures..........183

Locking and unlocking...........................37Automatic relocking.....................................39Central locking..............................................37Double locking..............................................37Double locking the doors with thekey..............................................................37

Locking and unlocking confirmation.........37Locking and unlocking the doors and theluggage compartment lid with theremote control..........................................38

Locking and unlocking the doors frominside..........................................................38

Locking and unlocking the doors with thekey..............................................................37

Luggage compartment lid..........................39Reprogramming the unlockingfunction......................................................39

Locks.........................................................37Luggage anchor points........................1764-door and 5-door......................................177Estate............................................................176

Luggage covers.....................................179Stowing the luggage cover - vehicles withtyre repair kit............................................180

MMaintenance.........................................205General information...................................205Technical specifications.............................218

Manual climate control.........................107Air conditioning............................................108Air distribution control.................................107Blower...........................................................107Heating the interior quickly........................107Recirculated air............................................107Ventilation.....................................................108

290

Index

Page 293: Mondeo MK3 Book

Manual seats..........................................120Adjusting the angle of the seatback........121Adjusting the height of the driver’sseat............................................................121

Adjusting the lumbar support....................121Moving the seats backwards andforwards...................................................120

Manual transmission.............................147Map pockets..........................................129Memory function...................................129Recalling a stored seat position...............130Resetting the memory...............................130Setting a memory pre-set.........................129

Message centreSee: Information displays............................84

MirrorsSee: Heated windows and mirrors...........112See: Windows and mirrors..........................71

MP3 connectionSee: Connecting an external device.......271See: Connecting an external device -Vehicles With: Bluetooth........................271

NNavigation introduction........................278Navigation system commands..........267Navigation system................................279

OOccupant protection..............................29Principle of operation...................................29

Oil checkSee: Engine oil check.................................216

See: Opening and closing the bonnet....206

OOpening and closing the bonnet.......206Closing the bonnet....................................206Opening the bonnet..................................206

PParking aid..............................................157Principle of operation.................................157

Parking aidSee: Using the parking aid.........................157

Parking brake.........................................150Applying the parking brake.......................150Parking on a hill...........................................150Releasing the parking brake.....................150

Parts and accessories..............................7Look for the Ford logo on the followingparts .............................................................8

Now you can be sure that your Ford partsare Ford parts..............................................7

Personalised settings.............................95Help screen, radio, navigation and phoneinformation................................................95

Language......................................................96Navigation information................................95Units of measure..........................................96

Power steering fluid check..................217Topping up...................................................217

Programming the remote control........34Programming a new remote control........34Reprogramming the unlockingfunction......................................................34

291

Index

Page 294: Mondeo MK3 Book

QQuick start..................................................11Adjusting the steering wheel.......................15Autolamps......................................................16Automatic climate control...........................18Automatic main beam control....................16Automatic transmission..............................20Autowipers.....................................................15Blind spot information system (BLIS).........17Changing the wiper blades ........................15Diesel particulate filter (DPF).......................19Driver alert......................................................21Electric child safety locks.............................14Electric folding mirrors..................................17Electric windows...........................................16Engine idle speed after starting..................19Fuel filler flap...................................................19Information displays......................................17Instrument panel overview - left-handdrive.............................................................11

Instrument panel overview - right-handdrive............................................................12

Keyless entry.................................................14Keyless starting.............................................19Lane departure warning..............................21Manual climate control.................................18Manual transmission....................................20Rear view camera........................................20Reverse mirror dipping.................................17Speed limiter..................................................21Towing the vehicle on four wheels.............21

RRear fog lamps........................................57Rear seats..............................................123Creating a level load floor..........................123Folding the seatbacks down....................123Folding the seatbacks up..........................124

Rear under floor storage......................179Vehicles with a sliding loadspacefloor...........................................................179

Vehicles without a sliding loadspacefloor...........................................................179

Rear view camera.................................159Principle of operation.................................159

Rear window wiper and washers.........51Intermittent wipe...........................................51Reverse gear wipe........................................51Washer............................................................51

Refuelling - E85......................................142Refuelling................................................142Remote control batterySee: Changing the remote controlbattery........................................................34

Remote control programmingSee: Programming the remote control.....34

Removing a headlamp...........................62Repairing minor paint damage...........222Road Safety...........................................278Safety information......................................278

Roof racks and load carriers................181Roof rack......................................................181

Running-in..............................................189Brakes and clutch.......................................189Engine...........................................................189Tyres.............................................................189

SSeat belt height adjustment..................32Seat belt reminder..................................32Deactivating the seat belt reminder..........32

Seat beltsSee: Fastening the seat belts.....................31

Seat memory functionSee: Memory function...............................129

Seats........................................................120Sitting in the correct position...............120Sliding loadspace floor..........................177Storage compartment...............................178

Snow chainsSee: Using snow chains............................234

Speed controlSee: Cruise control.....................................162

Speed limiter...........................................170Principle of operation.................................170

Stability control........................................151Principle of operation..................................151

Stability controlSee: Using stability control.........................151

Starter switchSee: Ignition switch.....................................132

292

Index

Page 295: Mondeo MK3 Book

Starting a diesel engine........................136Cold or hot engine......................................136

Starting a petrol engine - E85.............135Starting at low ambient temperatures...................................................................136

Starting a petrol engine........................135Cold or hot engine......................................135Engine idle speed after starting...............135Flooded engine...........................................135

Starting the engine................................132General information....................................132

Steering wheel lock...............................134Vehicles with keyless starting...................134Vehicles without keyless starting.............134

Steering wheel.........................................48Storage compartments........................128Sun blinds...............................................126SunroofSee: Electric sunroof...................................117

Switching off the engine.......................137Vehicles with a turbocharger....................137

Symbols glossary.......................................7Symbols in this handbook.............................7Symbols on your vehicle................................7

TTechnical specifications.......................240Technical specifications............................240

Telephone commands........................262Create a phonebook.................................265Main settings..............................................266Phone..........................................................262Phone functions.........................................263

Telephone controls...............................247Remote control..........................................247

Telephone setup...................................245Bond another Bluetooth phone..............246Making a phone an active phone...........245Phonebook.................................................245Phonebook categories.............................245

Telephone..............................................245General information...................................245

TelephoneSee: Using the telephone - Vehicles With:Navigation System................................250

See: Using the telephone - VehiclesWithout:Navigation System.................................247

Towing a trailer.......................................185Steep gradients..........................................185

Towing points........................................203Installing the towing eye...........................203Towing eye location...................................203

Towing the vehicle on fourwheels..................................................203All vehicles...................................................203Vehicles with automatictransmission...........................................204

Towing.....................................................185Transmission...........................................147Trip computer..........................................93Average fuel consumption.........................93Average speed.............................................93Distance to empty........................................93Odometer......................................................93Outside air temperature..............................93Tripmeter.......................................................93Type 1 and 2..................................................94Type 3............................................................94

Type approvals......................................281FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE..........281RX-42 - declaration of conformity...........281

Tyre care................................................233Tyre pressure monitoring system......234Checking the tyre pressures...................235Setting the vehicle load.............................235

Tyre pressuresSee: Technical specifications...................235

Tyre repair kit.........................................230Checking the tyre pressure.....................232General information...................................230Inflating the tyre...........................................231Using the tyre repair kit.............................230

TyresSee: Wheels and tyres..............................225

UUSB port..................................................131USBSee: Using a USB device..........................272

293

Index

Page 296: Mondeo MK3 Book

Using ACC..............................................165Automatic deactivation..............................168Changing the set speed............................166Setting a speed...........................................166Setting the vehicle gap..............................167Switching the system off...........................168Switching the system on...........................166Temporarily deactivating thesystem......................................................168

Using active suspension......................156Selecting a setting......................................156System malfunction...................................156

Using an iPod.........................................274CD Navigation units...................................276SD Navigation units....................................276Sony radio...................................................275

Using a USB device..............................272CD Navigation units...................................273SD Navigation units....................................274Sony radio...................................................272

Using booster cables...........................223To connect the booster cables...............223To start the engine.....................................223

Using cruise control..............................162Cancelling the set speed..........................162Changing the set speed............................162Resuming the set speed...........................163Setting a speed...........................................162Switching cruise control off.......................163Switching cruise control on.......................162

Using driver alert....................................172Resetting the system.................................173Switching the system on and off..............172System display............................................173System warnings........................................172

Using Eco mode....................................139Resetting Eco mode..................................139

Using hill start assist..............................153Activating the system................................154Deactivating the system............................155

Using lane departure warning.............174Setting the steering wheel vibrationlevel...........................................................175

Setting the system sensitivity...................175Switching the system on and off..............174System warnings........................................175

Using seat belts during pregnancy......32

Using snow chains...............................234Vehicles with stability control (ESP)........234

Using stability control.............................151Vehicles without stability control (ESP)switch.......................................................152

Vehicles with stability control (ESP)switch........................................................151

Using the parking aid............................157Manoeuvring with the parking aid............157Switching the parking aid on and off.......157

Using the rear view camera.................159Activating the rear view camera..............159Deactivating the rear view camera..........161Using the display.........................................159Vehicles with parking aid............................161

Using the speed limiter.........................170Intentionally exceeding the speedlimit............................................................170

Setting the speed limit...............................170System warnings.........................................171

Using the telephone - Vehicles With:Navigation System.............................250Changing the active phone......................251Debonding a bonded phone....................251Making a call...............................................250Muting the microphone............................250Receiving an incoming call.......................250Receiving a second incoming call...........250

Using the telephone - VehiclesWithout:Navigation System.............................247Changing the active phone......................249Debonding a bonded phone...................249Debonding a bonded phone - Sonyradio.........................................................249

Making a call...............................................247Muting the microphone............................249Receiving an incoming call.......................248Receiving a second incoming call...........248

Using voice control...............................252Name tag....................................................253System operation......................................252

Using winter tyres.................................234

VVehicle battery......................................223Vehicle care............................................221

294

Index

Page 297: Mondeo MK3 Book

Vehicle identification number(VIN)......................................................239

Vehicle identification plate...................239Vehicle identification.............................239Vehicle recovery...................................203Ventilated seats.....................................125Raising and lowering the temperatureautomatically...........................................125

Raising and lowering the temperaturemanually...................................................125

VentilationSee: Climate control...................................106

VentsSee: Air vents..............................................106

VINSee: Vehicle identification number(VIN).........................................................239

Voice control.........................................252Principle of operation................................252

WWarning lamps and indicators..............80ABS warning lamp........................................80Airbag warning lamp....................................80Blind spot monitor indicator........................80Brake system lamp......................................80Coolant temperature warning lamp..........80Direction indicators.......................................81Engine warning lamp....................................81Forward alert indicator.................................81Front fog lamp indicator...............................81Frost warning lamp.......................................81Glow plug indicator.......................................81Headlamp indicator......................................81Ignition warning lamp...................................81Lane departure warning indicator..............81Low fuel level warning lamp.......................82Main beam indicator....................................82Message indicator.......................................82Oil pressure warning lamp..........................82Rear fog lamp indicator...............................82Seat belt reminder.......................................82Shift indicator................................................82Stability control (ESP) warning lamp.........82

Warning triangle.....................................1904-door and 5-door.....................................190Estate and vehicles with tyre repairkit...............................................................190

Washer fluid check................................218WashersSee: Wipers and washers...........................50

WashingSee: Cleaning the exterior.........................221

Wheels and tyres..................................225General information...................................225Technical specifications............................235

Windows and mirrors..............................71Windscreen washers..............................51Windscreen wipers.................................50Intermittent wipe..........................................50

Winter tyresSee: Using winter tyres.............................234

Wipers and washers...............................50

295

Index

Page 298: Mondeo MK3 Book

296

Page 299: Mondeo MK3 Book
Page 300: Mondeo MK3 Book

Feel the difference

(CG3536en)